2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety.................................................................................................................ii
Important Handling Information.....................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance.....................................................................................................................2
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................63
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ..............................................................................................117
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................157
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................171
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................207
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Appearance Care..............................................................................................................................267
Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs.
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................275
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................303
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................319
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................323
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle, and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the Element. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda
dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to
your Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Honda, other
property, or the environment.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2003 Honda Element was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
on the vehicle.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Section
Instructions
Safety Headings
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Main Menu
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and the
section on page . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident.
Your Element has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher
ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and
rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
172
200
Off-Highway Guidelines
Important Handling Information
iii
Main Menu
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
SHIFT LEVER
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.76, 77)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.81)
TILT ADJUSTMENT
A/T model is shown.
CRUISE CONTROL
HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS
(P.153)
(P.82)
(P.81)
(P.78, 79)
(P.176, 179)
HORN
Main Menu
4
Main Menu
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supple-
mental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.........................................Airbags . 10
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
..................................Door Locks . 11
........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
............................Protecting Adults . 13
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 17
....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 20
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 20
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21
...Additional Safety Precautions . 22
........................Protecting Children . 24
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 24
Children Should Sit in the Back
...........................................Seat . 25
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to
..............................Children . 25
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 28
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 28
...Additional Safety Precautions . 29
General Guidelines for Using
...............................Child Seats . 29
.......................Protecting Infants . 34
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
.......Protecting Larger Children . 42
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 46
.............................Using LATCH . 47
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 50
..Seat Belt System Components . 50
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 50
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 52
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 53
Additional Information About Your
.....................................Airbags . 54
........................SRS Components . 54
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 54
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 56
How the SRS Indicator Light
.......................................Works . 57
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
...........Indicator Light Works . 58
.............................Airbag Service . 59
...Additional Safety Precautions . 59
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60
...................................Safety Labels . 61
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
.)
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page .)
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your vehicle is
equipped with airbags, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear your seat belts, and wear them
properly. (See page .)
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in the back seat,
notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo
smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page .)
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
17
24
10
210
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Restrain All Children
Don’t Drink and Drive
6
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some safety features do not require
anyactiononyourpart.These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
7
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(8)
(6)
(9)
(7)
(10)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats & Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags (EX model)
(9) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(10) Door Locks
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and
In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof
your passengers, your vehicle is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seat Belts
always wear your seat belts
properly.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
8
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including side and
rear impacts and rollovers. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person
is more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
What you should do:
9
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Your vehicle has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision.
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
10
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s seats are designed to
keep you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries. For
maximum protection, the back of
your head should rest against the
center of the head restraint.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the
vehicle is moving.
Keeping your doors locked reduces
thechanceofbeingthrownoutof
the vehicle during a crash. It also
helps prevent occupants from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out, and outsiders from
unexpectedly opening your doors.
How you adjust your seats and seat-
backs can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
theinsideofthevehicle,orbyan
inflating airbag.
Seats & Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Door Locks
What you should do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your vehicle’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearingthemproperly(seepage
).
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
inthebackseat(seepage ).
Frontseatoccupantsaresitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page
).
Head restraints are properly
adjusted (see page ).
Alldoorsandthetailgateare
closed and locked (see page ).
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page ).
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
17
24
13
15
16
13
167
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
12
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and
tailgate (including the hatch glass)
are closed.
Your vehicle has a door
monitor light on the
instrument panel to indicate when
any door is not tightly closed.
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
Your vehicle also has a
tailgate and hatch open
indicator light on the instrument
panel to indicate when the tailgate or
the hatch is not tightly closed.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the vehicle is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the vehicle during a crash.
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors.
42
87
CONTINUED
Introduction
Close and Lock the Doors
Adjust the Front Seats
1.
2.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
adjust the seat so the center of the
chest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)
away from the center of the steering
wheel.Alsomakesureyourfront
seat passenger moves the seat as far
to the rear as possible.
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and
movetheseatawayfromthe
steering wheel to the farthest
distance that allows you to maintain
full control of the vehicle.
92
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for how to adjust seat-
backs.
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injured if the front airbag inflates.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
92
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before driving, make sure everyone
with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
94
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
16
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
If necessary, pull up on the shoulder
belt again to remove any slack from
the shoulder belt, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
17
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
To adjust the height of a front seat
belt anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
18
RELEASE BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Honda dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
See page for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts.
50
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt.
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
See page for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the vehicle,
or by being struck by an inflating
front airbag. Being struck by an
inflating side airbag can result in
possibly serious injuries.
82
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6. 7.
20
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a vehicle.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your vehicle’s
airbags and other safety features,
you must sit properly and wear your
seat belt properly.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Advice for Pregnant Women
21
Main Menu
Table of Contents
All passengers
must sit in locked, upright seats
andbeproperlyrestrainedbyseat
belts.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp objects in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a f olded-
down back seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
22
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your
hands or arms are close to the
airbag cover in the center of the
steering wheel or on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the front airbag inflates.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
On models with side airbags, do
not attach hard objects on or near
a f ront door.
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to
protect young passengers. (See page
.)
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
other children in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
(See page .)
29
42
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat.
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt, and use a
booster, if needed.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
24
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it inflates with tremendous
speed.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
In the back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
During a
crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
serious injuries.
Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your vehicle crashes into a parked
vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
CONTINUED
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
Additional Precautions to Parents
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant or child.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, in a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
Infants
Never put a rear-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Small Children Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inf lating passenger’s
front airbag.
26
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboardand
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your vehicle has warning
labels on the driver’s and front
passenger’s visors. Please read and
follow the instructions on these
labels.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
U.S. Models Canadian Models
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Your vehicle has two seating
positions in the back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry more than
two children in your vehicle:
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
42
13
20
17
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
28
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the tailgate or hatch,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
Children
who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside the
vehicle. Teach your children not to
play in or around vehicles.
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
Additional Safety Precautions
Keep vehicle keys out of the reach
of children.
Lock all doors and the hatch when
your vehicle is not in use.Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle.
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the box and seat.
Childrenuptoaboutone
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
for additional information on
protecting infants.
A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing child seat. See page for
additional information on protecting
small children.34
38
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet safety
standards.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Infants: Small Children:
2.
1.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
30
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
However, Honda is confident that
one or more child seat models can fit
andbeproperlyinstalledinall
recommended seating positions in
your vehicle.
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
Your vehicle has lower anchors
installed for use with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) - compatible child seats.
For more information, see page .48
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
The child seat should f it the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
3.
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a small child must ride in the
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
This page briefly summarizes
Honda’s recommendations on where
to place rear-facing and forward-
facing child seats in your vehicle.
The passenger’s front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill
or seriously injure an infant in a
rear-facing child seat.
A small child in a forward-facing
child seat is also at risk. If the
vehicle seat is too far forward,
or the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard.
Not recommended,
due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position and secure a
forward-facing child seat with the
seat belt (see page ).
Recommended positions.
Properlysecurearear-facingchild
seat (see page ).
Recommended
positions. Properly secure a
forward-facing child seat (see
page ).
39
35
39
Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat
Infants:
Small children:
Back Seats
Infants:
Small children:
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
32
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbethrownoutoftheseatina
crash and be seriously injured.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the vehicle during
a crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-to-
side or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
All child seats are
designed to be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt. Some child seats
can be secured to the vehicle’s
LATCH anchorage system instead.
A child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash. See pages
, and for instructions on
howtoproperlysecurechildseats
in this vehicle.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
483935
Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.
Storing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is f irmly
secured.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In this vehicle, a rear-facing child
seatcanbeplacedinanyseating
position in the back, but not in the
front seat.
If the passenger’s
front airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
force to kill or seriously injure an
infant. If an infant must be closely
watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
with the baby.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
We recommend that an infant be
restrained in a rear-facing child seat
until the infant is at least one year
old, reaches the seat maker’s weight
or height limit, and is able to sit up
without support.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
Protecting Inf ants
Child Seat Type
Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a rear-f acing child seat in
the front seat.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
34
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
seats have a locking mechanism that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
The following pages provide
instructions and tips on how to
secure a rear-facing child seat with
this type of seat belt.
With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
If you have a child seat designed to
attach to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .48
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
5.4.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
36
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Forproperprotection,aninfantmust
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page ).
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat directly
behind the front passenger seat,
move the front seat as far forward as
needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or
you may wish to get a smaller child
seat that allows you to safely carry a
front passenger.
13
15
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
In this vehicle, the best place to
install a forward-facing child seat is
in one of the seating positions in the
back seat.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to cause
very serious or fatal injuries. If a
small child must be closely watched,
we recommend that another adult sit
in the back seat with the child.
A child at least one year old who can
sit up without support, and who fits
within the child seat maker’s weight
and height limits, should be
restrained in a forward-facing,
upright child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
38
Main Menu
Table of Contents
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
and front passenger seating positions
have a locking mechanism that must
be activated to secure a child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle, and
that the child is properly strapped in
the seat.
If you have a child seat designed to
attach to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .48
1.
CONTINUED
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Child Seat Installation
39
Improperly placing a forward-
facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
mayhelptoputweightonthe
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
2.
3.
4.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
40
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To deactivate the locking
mechanism in order to remove a
child seat, unlatch the buckle,
unroute the seat belt, and let the belt
fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
5.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat on a
booster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.
We recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
sit in the rear seat, all the way back
against the seat, and put on the seat
belt. Follow the instructions on page
. Then check how the belt fits.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
17
Protecting Larger Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
42
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible,
uses a booster seat if needed,
and wears the seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, and
the lap belt rests over the child’s
hipbones and touches the tops of
their thighs as shown, the child is
probably big enough to wear the seat
belt.
However, if the shoulder belt
touchesorcrossesthechild’sneck,
or if the lap belt crosses the child’s
stomach, the child needs to use a
booster seat.
This could result in serious neck and
internal injuries during a crash.
If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.
If a child needs a booster seat, we
recommend choosing a high or low-
back style that allows the child to be
directly secured with the lap/
shoulder belt.
CONTINUED
Using a Booster SeatDo not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck or over the stomach.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
In addition, the passenger’s front
airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the seat is too far forward, or the
child’s head is thrown forward
during a collision, or the child is
unrestrained or out of position, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
If a child who uses a booster must
ride in front, move the vehicle seat
as far to the rear as possible, and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of the ears are
even with the top of the seat-back. A
child of this height should be tall
enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
without a booster.
Even then, the child may still need to
use a booster seat. Note that some
states now require children to use
boosters until they reach a certain
ageand/orweight.Besuretocheck
current laws in the state or states
where you intend to drive. On models with side airbags, the
side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying airbag, the child
could receive possibly serious
injuries.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
44
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
On models with side airbags,
remind the child not to lean
toward the door because of the
side airbag.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
17 42
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available. (Tethers are required in
Canada.)
Remove the head restraint where
you want to place the child seat.
Your vehicle has two tether
anchorage points on the ceiling near
the hatch opening for securing a
tether-style child seat to the vehicle.
The tether anchorage points are
located under plastic covers. Select
the anchorage point you want to use,
and slide the cover to open it. You can remove the head restraint
by pressing the release button.
Using Child Seats with Tethers
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
46
COVERS
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the removed head
restraints are secured in the cargo
area. Reinstall the head restraints
when the child seat is removed.
Attach the attaching clip to the
tether anchorage point as shown in
the illustration, then tighten the
strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) at the rear
seats. The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The exact location of each lower
anchorage is marked with a small
button above the lower anchorage
point.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
Using LATCH
47
LOWER ANCHORS
MARKS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Remove the plastic cover by
pulling it forward.
Make sure there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Foreign objects could get in the
way of a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Put the child seat in the rear left
or right vehicle seat and attach the
child seat to the lower anchors
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions.
Follow the child seat maker’s
instructions for any additional
advice on adjusting or tightening
the fit.1.
2.
3. 4.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
48
Flexible type
Rigid type
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the head restraint (see
page ).
Make sure the removed head
restraints are secured in the cargo
area. Reinstall the head restraints
when the child seat is removed.
Attach the attaching clip to the
tether anchor fitting and tighten
the strap according to the child
seat maker’s instructions. Make
sure the strap is not twisted.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers.
This symbol on rear or forward
facing child seats or booster
cushions indicates the presence of
LATCH compatible hardware.
5. 6.
7.
94
Canadian model only
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Lower Universal Anchorage
System Symbol
49
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.
Guide the belt across your body to
the door pillar. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all four seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
50
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The seat belts in all seating positions
except the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages and for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
See page for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly.
35
39
17
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions.
The tensioners are independent of
the airbag system, so they can be
activated during a collision that
might not cause the airbags to
deploy. In this case, the airbags
would not be needed but the
additional seat belt tension can be
helpful.
The tensioners will be activated in a
collision severe enough to cause the
front airbags to inflate.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
way.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page ).57
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
52
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Honda will repair or
replace any seat belt component that
fails to function properly during
normal use. Please see your
booklet for
details.
271
Honda
Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
U.S. Models
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags and activate the
automatic seat belt tensioners.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
stage, dual-threshold airbags to help
reduce the chance of airbag-caused
injuries.
52
57
SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
54
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled
that came with your
owner’s manual.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags
.
SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Your vehicle is equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
Optional on EX model
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How Your Side Airbags Work
56
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
andoffwhileyoudrive.
The SRS indicator light
alerts you to a potential
problem with your front airbags and
automatic seat belt tensioners.
On models with side airbags, this
light will also alert you to a potential
problem with your side airbags or
passenger’s side airbag automatic
cutoff system (see page ).
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly.
If you see any of these indications,
your front or side airbags may not
deploy, your passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system may not
work properly, or your seat belt
tensioners may not work when you
need them. See your Honda dealer
as soon as possible.
58
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS light alerts you to a
potential problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the indicator should light
briefly and go out (see page ). If it
doesn’t light, stays on, or comes on
while driving without a passenger in
the front seat, have the system
checked.
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
If the side airbag cutoff indicator
light comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
It does not mean there is a problem
with your side airbags. It means that
thesideairbagcutoffsystemhas
activated to prevent the side airbag
from deploying.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in the front, this
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
67
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the Side Airbag Cutof f
Indicator Light Works
58
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
See page for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
Improperly
replacing or covering front seat-
back covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit, automatic seat belt
tensioners, and other related parts.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by a Honda dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
Your front and side airbag systems
(if equipped) are virtually
maintenance-free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Take your vehicle to
an authorized Honda dealer as
soon as possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
166
Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting a
Honda dealer.
Your airbags ever inflate.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
59
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the under-
side.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
Select the Fresh Air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
With the tailgate/hatch open, air
flow can pull exhaust gas into your
vehicle’s interior and create a
hazardous condition. If you must
drive with the tailgate/hatch open,
openallthewindowsandsetthe
heating and cooling system as shown
below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
60
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your Honda dealer
for a replacement.
CONTINUED
U.S. models only
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
61
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
On models without side airbags
On models with side airbags
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
62
HOOD
RADIATOR CAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Honda. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 64
...............................Indicator Lights . 65
.............................................Gauges . 72
...............................Speedometer . 72
.................................Tachometer . 72
..............Odometer/Trip Meter . 73
..................................Fuel Gauge . 73
...................Temperature Gauge . 74
Controls Near the Steering
.......................................Wheel . 75
...................................Headlights . 76
............Daytime Running Lights . 77
....Instrument Panel Brightness . 77
................................Turn Signals . 77
.....................Windshield Wipers . 78
..................Windshield Washers . 79
Rear Window Wiper and
.....................................Washer . 80
..........................Hazard Warning . 81
.............Rear Window Defogger . 81
......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 82
...............................Keys and Locks . 83
..............................................Keys . 83
....................Immobilizer System . 84
............................Ignition Switch . 85
......................Power Door Locks . 87
..................................Rear Doors . 88
............................................Hatch . 89
........................................Tailgate . 90
....................................Glove Box . 91
.................................................Seats . 92
.............Front Seat Adjustments . 92
Driver’s Seat Height
..............................Adjustment . 93
................Driver’s Seat Armrest . 93
..........................Head Restraints . 94
........................Rear Seat Access . 95
.......Rear Seat-back Adjustment . 96
..........Reclining the Front Seats . 97
...............Folding the Rear Seats . 99
........Removing the Rear Seats . 101
............................Power Windows . 103
...............................Rear Windows . 105
...........................................Mirrors . 106
..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 106
..........................................Skylight . 107
.........................Beverage Holders . 110
...............................Parking Brake . 111
...............................Ceiling Pocket . 112
.......................................Coin Tray . 112
............Accessory Power Sockets . 113
...............................Interior Lights . 114
..............................Ceiling Light . 114
...................................Spotlights . 114
......................Cargo Area Light . 115
................Ignition Switch Light . 115
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
63
Main Menu
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
65
IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.68)
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED INDICATOR
(P.70)
(P.67)
DOOR-OPEN
INDICATOR
(P.70)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
(P.69)
SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR
(P.67)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.66, 290)
(P.66, 291)
(P.69)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATORSEAT BELT
REMINDER LIGHT
(P.67)
TAILGATE AND HATCH
OPEN INDICATOR
(P.70)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.69)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.68)
(P.66, 292)
(P.66, 294)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page .
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
This light has two functions:
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II). It
is a reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.
If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page .
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page .
2.
1.
292
290
291
294
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
66
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags or automatic seat
belt tensioners. On models equipped
with side airbags, this light will also
alert you to a potential problem with
your side airbags or passenger’s side
airbag automatic cutoff system. For
complete information, see page .
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
58
57
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Side Airbag Cutof f
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Light
67
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signaling.
WhenyouturnontheHazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the vehicle should flash.
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If this light comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With the light on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock. For complete
information, see page .188
84 259
Only on models equipped with ABS (see
page )
186
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
Indicators
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
68
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian models only Canadian models only
On EX model
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) with
the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
youturnontheheadlightsorrelease
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page for
information on the headlight
controls.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page ).
This light comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page ).
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page for information
on operating the cruise control.
77
76
153
230
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
and 10,000 miles (16,000 km), this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
This light comes on if any door is not
closed tightly.
For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on pages .
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
This light comes on if the tailgate or
the hatch is not closed tightly.
212 216
Indicator Lights
Maintenance Required
Indicator
Door-open Indicator
Tailgate and Hatch Open
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
70
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Honda dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
Turn off the engine.
Press and hold the select/reset
button in the instrument panel,
then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
Hold the button until the indicator
resets (approximately ten
seconds).
1.
2.
3.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
71
Main Menu
Table of Contents
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
Tachometer
72
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
SELECT/RESET BUTTONODOMETER/TRIP METER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The odometer shows the total dis-
tance your vehicle has been driven.
It measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
The trip meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Switch between these displays
and the odometer by pressing the
Select/Reset button repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the vehicle
is on level ground. It may show
slightly more or less than the actual
amount when you are driving on
curvy or hilly roads.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
Instruments and Controls
Gauges
Odometer/Trip Meter Fuel Gauge
73
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper white zone. If it reaches the
red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
288
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Temperature Gauge
74
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Thetwoleversonthesteering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
The hazard warning lights switch is
on the dashboard beside the shift
lever.
The control under the left air vent is
for the cruise control.
The tilt adjustment lever on the
underside of the steering column
allows you to tilt the steering wheel.
:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
75
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.76, 77)
(P.78, 79)
SHIFT LEVER (A/T)
HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS
A/T model is shown.
CRUISE CONTROL
(P.179)
(P.81)
(P.153)
HORN
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.81)
TILT ADJUSTMENT
(P.82)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off. The high beams will
stay on for as long as you hold the
lever back, no matter what position
the headlight switch is in.
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate light.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
If you leave the lights on, you will
hear a reminder tone when you open
the driver’s door.
To change from low beams to high
beams, push the turn signal lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will light
(see page ). To return to low
beams, pull the turn signal lever
back.
69
Headlights
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
76
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian models only
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
Push the knob in the speedometer
repeatedly to adjust the brightness
of the instrument panel lights. There
are six brightness levels. A segment
display shows the current brightness
level.
CONTINUED
Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights Turn Signals
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
77
TURN SIGNAL LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
This lever controls the windshield
wipers and washers. It has five
positions:
MIST: mist
OFF: off
INT: intermittent
LO: low speed
HI: high speed
To select a position, push the lever
up or down.
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. In low speed and
high speed, the wipers run continu-
ously.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Windshield Wipers
78
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever up from the
OFF position. The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
This gives you a quick way to clear
the windshield.
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever.
The wipers run at low speed while
you’re pulling the lever, then
complete one more sweep of the
windshield after you release it.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Windshield Washers
79
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Therotatingswitchontheright
lever controls the rear window wiper
and washer.
Therearwindowwasherusesthe
same fluid reservoir as the wind-
shield washer.
To activate the rear windshield wiper,
rotate the switch to ‘‘ON’’. The wiper
operates every seven seconds after
completing two sweeps. When you
turn the wiper switch to the ‘‘OFF’’
position or turn off the ignition
switch, the wiper will return to its
parked position.
To use the wiper and washer, rotate
and hold the switch one position up
from ‘‘ON’’. The wiper opreates
while you are holding the switch,
then completes two more sweeps
after you release it. To use the
washer only, rotate and hold the
switch one position down from
‘‘OFF’’.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
Instruments and Controls
80
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light in the
button lights to show the defogger is
on.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Thedefoggerwiresontheinsideof
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side to side.
Push the button next to the shift
levertoturnonthehazardwarning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
To adjust the steering wheel upward
or downward:
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Push the lever under the left side
of the steering column all the way
down.
Move the steering wheel to the
desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
1.
2.
3.
4.
See page for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
20
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
82
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Your vehicle comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
When replacing keys, use only
Honda-approved key blanks.
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the door locks. You can
keep the glove box and hatch locked
when you leave your vehicle and the
valet key at a parking facility.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your set of keys.
You will need this number if you
ever have to get a lost key replaced.
Keep the tag stored in a safe place.
When replacing keys, use only
Honda-approved key blanks.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle:
• Ignition
• Doors
•GloveBox
•Hatch
Keys
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
83
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
MASTER
KEYS
(Black)
VALET
KEY
(Gray)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. A properly-
coded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
vehicle’s key and the ignition
switch while trying to start the
engine.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Honda dealer.
The Immobilizer System indicator
will also blink several times when
you turn the ignition switch from ON
(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undriveable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Honda dealer.
Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
Keys and Locks
84
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
•LOCK(0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. If your vehicle
has an automatic transmission, the
shift lever must also be in Park. The
anti-theft lock will lock the steering
column when you remove the key.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
Keys and Locks
Ignition Switch LOCK (0)
85
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
).
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power sockets.
This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the vehicle are
usable. Several of the lights on the
instrument panel come on as a test
when you turn the ignition switch
from ACCESSORY to ON.
84
START (III)ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
86
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The front doors can be locked and
unlocked from the outside with the
key.
The master door lock switch on the
driver’s door locks and unlocks all of
the doors and the hatch. Push the
switch down to lock all of the doors
and the hatch, and up to unlock them.
To lock the front passenger’s door
when getting out the vehicle, push
the lock tab down and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
outside door handle and push the
locktabdownorpushthemaster
switch down. Release the handle,
then close the door.
Each front door has a lock tab at the
top of the door. When you push
down the lock tab on the driver’s
door, all doors and the hatch lock.
Pulling up the lock tab on the driver’s
door unlocks only that door. The
locktabonthefrontpassenger’s
door only locks and unlocks that
door.
CONTINUED
Power Door Locks
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
87
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
All doors and the hatch lock when
youpushdownthelocktabonthe
driver’s door, or lock the driver’s
door from the outside with the key.
Only the driver’s door unlocks when
you use the key or the lock tab. To
unlock the front passenger’s door,
use the master door lock switch or
the lock tab on the front passenger’s
door.
The Element has no center pillars
between front and rear seats, and
the rear doors pivot at the rear.
The rear door handle is located in
the rear door edge. The rear door
canbeopenedonlywhenthefront
door is open. Pull the handle to open
the rear door.
To close the doors when both front
and rear doors are open, close the
rear door first, then the front door.
The front door cannot be latched
without first closing the rear door.
Closing the rear door on the front
door will damage both doors.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Rear Doors
88
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
You can lock or unlock the hatch in
any of these ways:
Useyourmasterkeytolockand
unlock the hatch.
Turnthekeyclockwisetolockthe
hatch, and counterclockwise to
unlock it.
Lock the hatch by pushing down
the lock tab on the driver’s door
(see page ), or by using the
master key in the driver’s door
lock.
Lock or unlock the hatch with the
master door lock switch.
With the hatch unlocked, open it by
pulling the handle and lifting up.
To close the hatch, lower it, then
press down on the back edge.
When both the hatch and tailgate are
open, the hatch cannot be latched
without first closing the tailgate.
87
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Hatch
89
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for information on
cargo loading. Keep the hatch closed
at all times while driving to avoid
damaging the hatch, and to prevent
exhaust gas from getting into the
interior. See
on page .
Youcanopenthetailgateonlywhen
the hatch is open. To open the
tailgate, slide the lock lever to the
left and swing down the tailgate. To
close the tailgate, lift it up and push
it firmly until it latches.
Before closing the tailgate, make
sure the hatch is raised. Closing the
tailgate on the lowered hatch can
damage the hatch and the tailgate.
See page for information on
cargo loading. Keep the tailgate and
the hatch closed at all times while
driving to avoid damaging them, and
to prevent exhaust gas from getting
into the interior. See
on page .60 60
167167
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Carbon Monoxide
Hazard
Tailgate
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
90
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.
Glove Box
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
91
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
13 15
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To change the angle of the seat-back,
pull up on the lever on the outside of
the seat bottom. Move the seat-back
to the desired position and release
the lever. Let the seat-back latch into
the new position.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
FrontSeatAdjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
92
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To adjust the height of the driver’s
seat, turn the dial on the outside of
the seat bottom.
The driver’s seat has an armrest on
thesideoftheseat-back.Touseit,
pivotitdown.
On EX models
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Driver’s Seat Armrest
Seats
Instruments and Controls
93
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
16
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions.
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries. They are most
effective when you adjust them so
the back of the occupant’s head rests
against the center of the restraint. A
taller person should adjust the
restraint as high as possible.
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
Head Restraints
Seats
Instruments and Controls
94
RELEASE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Although your vehicle has rear doors,
the rear seat passengers can get out
of the vehicle from the open front
passenger’s door. Push down on the
release lever at the base of the front
passenger’s seat-back, and push the
seat-back forward. The seat-back will
tilt forward and the entire seat will
move forward to allow easier exit
through the front door.
After you return the seat cushion to
the desired position, pull the seat-
back upright until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
Rear Seat Access
Seats
Instruments and Controls
95
RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
13 15
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
The seat-back angle of each rear
seat can be adjusted separately.
To change the seat-back angle, pull
the strap at the inside edge of the
seat cushion, and move the seat-back
to the desired position, then release
the strap. Make sure the seat-back
latches in the new position.
Rear Seat-back Adjustment
Seats
Instruments and Controls
96
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the head restraints from
the front seats (see page ).
You can recline the seat-backs on the
front seats to a fully flat position so
they are level with the rear seat
cushions, making a large cushioned
area.Todothis:
Store the head restraints in the
side pockets of the cargo area.
1.
94
CONTINUED
Reclining the Front Seats
Seats
Instruments and Controls
97
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the front seats forward as
far as they will go. Pull up the seat-
back angle adjustment lever and
pivot the seat-back backward.
Release the lever when the seat-
back is level with the rear seat
cushion.
Move the front seat backward
until it touches the rear seat.
Adjust the rear seat-back to the
desired position.
Reverse this procedure to return the
front and rear seats to the upright
position. Make sure you install the
head restraints and the seats are
locked securely before driving.
When you return the seat-back to
the upright position, hold the seat-
back to keep it from going up too
quickly.
2. 3. 4.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
98
SLIDE BAR
SEAT-BACK ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To create more cargo space, you can
fold up each rear seat to each side
wall separately.
Lower the head restraint to its
lowest position.
Pull the seat-back adjustment
strap at the inside edge of the seat
cushion and push the seat-back
backward as far as it will go.
Pull the release strap on the seat
support, and pivot the seat toward
the vehicle’s side wall.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Folding the Rear Seats
Seats
Instruments and Controls
99
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP
RELEASE STRAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fold down the seat support.A fastening strap is attached to the
inside of the seat cushion. While
pushing the seat up and toward
thesidewall,hookthefastening
straptothegrabrail.
Reverse this procedure to return the
rear seat to the upright position.
When not in use, store the fastening
strap hook in the fabric pocket on
the bottom of the seat cushion.
Make sure the seat is locked
securely.
4.
5.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
100
GRAB RAIL
FASTENING STRAP
SEAT SUPPORT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Both seats can be removed to give
more cargo capacity.
To remove a seat:
Pull the seat-back adjustment
strap at the inside edge of the seat
cushion and push the seat-back
backward until seat cushion and
seat-back are level.
Remove the cover between the
seat cushion and the side wall by
pulling the tab and pulling the
cover straight up.
Pull the release strap on the seat
support to unlock the seat support.
1.
3.2.
CONTINUED
Removing the Rear Seats
Seats
Instruments and Controls
101
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP
RELEASE STRAP
COVER
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reverse this procedure to reinstall
the seat. Make sure the seat is
securely locked.
Push the lock lever forward to
unlock the seat.
Hold the steel handle next to the
lock lever and the holding strap at
the outside edge of the seat
cushion, and remove the entire
seat by pulling it up and backward.
Always remove an unsecured seat
from the vehicle before driving. A
seat that is not locked in place could
be thrown about and cause injury in
a sudden stop or crash.
4.
5.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
102
LOCK LEVER STEEL HANDLE
HANDLE STRAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s front windows are
electrically-powered. Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) to raise or
lower either window.
Each front door has a switch that
controls its window. To open the
window, push the switch down and
hold it. Release the switch when you
want the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
The driver’s door armrest has a
master power window control panel.
To open the passenger’s window,
push down on the switch and hold it
until the window reaches the desired
position. To close the window, pull
back on the window switch. Release
the switch when the window gets to
the position you want.
CONTINUED
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
103
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The master control panel also con-
tains these extra features:
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
The light in the AUTO switch comes
on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
The MAIN switch controls power to
the passenger’s window. When you
push in the MAIN switch, the
passenger’s window cannot be raised
or lowered. The MAIN switch does
not affect the driver’s window. To
cancel this feature, push on the
switch again. Keep the MAIN switch
pushed in when you have children in
the vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
passenger’s window unintentionally.
AUTO
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
104
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse. You should do
the following.
Start the engine. Push down on
the driver’s window switch until
the window is fully open.
Pull back on the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
If the driver’s window runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.
To open a rear window, pull the lever
towards you, then push it out until it
locks. To close the rear window pull
the lever towards you, then push it
back. Make sure the window is fully
closed and locked.
1.
2.
Auto Reverse Rear Windows
Power Windows, Rear Windows
Instruments and Controls
105
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment switch on the driver’s
door armrest:
3.
4.
1.
2.
On U.S. EX, and Canadian DX and EX
models
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
106
TAB
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s skylight can be
removed (see page ). You can
also lift up the rear of the skylight
for ventilation.
To lift up the rear of the skylight,
pull down the lever to unlock the
skylight, then push it up until the
skylight is locked in the tilt-up
position.
To close the skylight, pull down the
lever to unlock the skylight, then
push it back in place. Make sure the
skylight is fully closed and locked.
108
On 4WD models only
Skylight
Instruments and Controls
107
If you try to tilt up the skylight in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage it.
Before lifting the skylight, make sure
the roof of the vehicle is dry. Rain or
remaining water after car-washing may
get into the frame of the skylight. In
winter, remove the buildup of snow on
the roof.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove the skylight:
Turn off the engine, and set the
parkingbrake.Thenpulldownthe
lever, squeeze both sides of the pivot
while pushing up the red tab in the
lever, and pull the lever assembly
away from the ceiling.
Push up the rear of the skylight.
Standing on the tailgate with the
hatch down, hold both sides of the
skylight and pull it toward you to
remove it from the vehicle roof.
With the rear seats in their upright
position, store the skylight, face
down in its bag in the cargo area.
Secure the bag with four hooks on
the cargo area floor. Do not store
anything on top of the skylight.
Removing and Storing the
Skylight
Skylight
Instruments and Controls
108
The maximum weight on the tailgate is
440 lbs (200 kg).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To reinstall the skylight, reverse the
removal procedure, making sure the
air deflector is pushed down. When
reinstalling the lever assembly, align
both pivots with the receptacle holes,
let the pivots move out until they rest
intheholessecurely.Makesurethe
skylight is fully closed and latched.
Skylight
Instruments and Controls
109
An unsecured skylight can be
thrown about and cause serious
injury in a sudden stop or crash.
Make sure to store the skylight
in its bag, and secure the bag to
the hooks on the cargo area
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holder. A spilled liquid that
is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, seat material,
and electrical components in the
interior.
The center console has three
beverage holders for the front and
rear passengers.
Each rear seat has a beverage holder
at the inside edge of the seat cushion.
Beverage Holders
Instruments and Controls
110
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake light on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released (see page ).66
Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
111
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the ceiling pocket, push on
the button. The lid will unlatch and
swing open. To close it, push it until
it latches. Make sure the lid is closed
while you are driving.
To open the coin tray, pull the lid
down. To close the lid, push it up.
The back of the ceiling pocket lid
has a pen and card holder. Use the
ceiling pocket to store small items
only. Storing heavy objects will
damage the bottom net.
On EX model
Ceiling Pocket Coin Tray
Ceiling Pocket, Coin Tray
Instruments and Controls
112
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has one or two
accessory power sockets, depending
on the model. All models have a
front accessory power socket on the
dashboard above the glove box.
To use the accessory power socket,
pull up the cover.
The EX model has another
accessory power socket in the cargo
area on the right side.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps). To power an accessory, the
ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
They will not power an automotive
type cigarette lighter element.
When both sockets are being used,
the combined power rating of each
accessory should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).
On EX models
Accessory Power Sockets
Instruments and Controls
113
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you leave any door open with the
keynotintheignitionswitch,the
ceiling light will go off after three
minutes.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light fades out in about 30 seconds.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch. In the OFF position, the light
does not come on. In the center
position, the ceiling light comes on
when you open any door. After all
doors are closed tightly, the light
fades out in about 30 seconds. In the
ON position, the ceiling light stays
on continuously.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) also comes on
when you unlock the door with the
key, the lock tab on the driver’s door,
or the master door lock switch. Turn on the spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
On EX models
Ceiling Light Spotlights
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
114
ON
OFF
DOOR ACTIVATED
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ignition switch light comes on
when you unlock the driver’s door,
and fades out about 30 seconds after
you close the door.
The cargo area light has a three-
position switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, the light comes on
when you open the hatch. In the ON
position, the light stays on
continuously.
Cargo Area Light Ignition Switch Light
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
115
ON
OFF
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
HATCH ACTIVATED
Main Menu
Table of Contents
116
Main Menu
.....................Heating and Cooling . 118
.........What Each Control Does . 118
............How to Use the System . 121
..........To Turn Everything Off . 125
................................Audio System . 126
Audio System
..........(Canadian DX model) . 126
....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 126
.................Operating the Radio . 126
.................Adjusting the Sound . 129
..............................Digital Clock . 130
............Audio System Lighting . 132
.........Operating the CD Player . 132
.....Operating the CD Changer . 134
....CD Player Error Indications . 135
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 136
...........Audio System (EX model) . 137
....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 137
.................Operating the Radio . 138
.................Adjusting the Sound . 141
..............................Digital Clock . 142
............Audio System Lighting . 143
....................Radio Frequencies . 143
........................Radio Reception . 143
.........Operating the CD Player . 145
.....Operating the CD Changer . 147
....CD Player Error Indications . 148
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 149
.......Protecting Compact Discs . 150
..................Auxiliary Input Jack . 151
.......................Theft Protection . 152
...............................Cruise Control . 153
Comfort and Convenience Features
Comfort and Convenience Features
117
Main Menu
Proper use of the Heating and
Cooling system can make the
interior dry and comfortable, and
keep the windows clear for the best
visibility.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the fan’s speed, which increases air
flow.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the air flow.
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator in this button is lit, air
from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recircula-
tion mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
Use the MODE control dial to select
the vents the air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
vents in all modes.
This button turns the air condi-
tioning ON and OFF. The indicator
in the button lights when the A/C is
on.
81
On U.S. EX models, and Canadian DX
and EX models
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
What Each Control Does
Fan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dials
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control Dial
118
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In these two modes, the A/C stays
on, but the indicator in the A/C
button stays off.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Air flow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the center
and side vents in the dashboard.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
Recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard.
EX models
EX models
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each side of
the dashboard is adjustable.
To adjust the air flow from each
center vent, move the tab up-and-
down and side-to-side.
To adjust the air flow from each side
vent,movethetabinthecenterof
each vent side-to-side, and rotate the
vent with the tab.
Each side vent can be opened and
closed with the tab underneath the
vent.
Heating and Cooling
Vent Controls
Comfort and Convenience Features
120
CENTER VENTS
PASSENGER’S SIDE VENTDRIVER’S SIDE VENT
Close
Open
Close
Open
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Turn the temperature control dial
all the way to the left.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep
these clear of leaves and other
debris.
It is best to leave the system in Fresh
Air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in Recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
you are driving through smoky or
dusty conditions, then switch back to
Fresh Air mode when the condition
clears.
This section covers how to set up the
system controls for ventilation,
heating, cooling, dehumidifying, and
defrosting.
The engine must be running for the
heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air. The heater
uses engine coolant to warm the air.
If the engine is cold, it will be several
minutes before you feel warm air
coming from the system.
The air conditioning does not rely on
engine temperature.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the tailgate.
1.
2.
3.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Ventilation
How to Use the System
121
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL
DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Set the mode control dial to MAX
A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects and
switches to Recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The light in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
EX models
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
To Cool with A/C
122
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL
DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
MAX A/C
POSITION
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
) when driving in stop-and-go
traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.
If it moves near the red zone, turn
off the A/C until the gauge reads
normally.
To warm the interior:
Start the engine.
Select .
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the mixture of heated and
cooled air feels comfortable.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
74 1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
To Heat To Heat and Dehumidify with Air
Conditioning
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
To remove exterior frost or ice from
the windshield and side windows
after the vehicle has been sitting out
in cold weather:
Start the engine.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches
to Fresh Air mode and turns on
the A/C.
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum.
To rapidly remove exterior frost or
ice from the windshield (on very cold
days), first select the Recirculation
mode. Once the windshield is clear,
select the Fresh Air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
These settings direct all the air flow
to the defroster vents at the base of
the windshield and the side window
defroster vents. The air flow will get
warmer and clear the windows faster
as the engine warms up.
For safety, make sure you have a
clear view through all the windows
before driving away.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C (the indicator in the A/C
button does not come on).
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the air flow from the
defroster vents feels warm.
Turn on the rear window defogger
to help clear the rear window.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
To Defog and Defrost
124
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To shut off the system temporarily,
turn the fan speed and temperature
control dials all the way to the left.
No air flow can cause the windows to
fogup.Itisrecommendedthatyou
keep the fan on at all times so stale
air and moisture do not build up in
the interior and cause fogging.
To Turn Everything Off
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM/FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
same knob.
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
On Canadian DX models
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
Operating the Radio
AM/FM/CD Player Audio System
126
SEEK BAR
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
SCAN INDICATOR
PRESET BUTTONS
AM/FM BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
AUTO
SELECT
BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
preset button to tune to it.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Pick the preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
To store a frequency:You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset buttons.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Releasetheknobwhenthedisplay
reaches the desired frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
theSEEKbaroneitherthe or
side, then release it.
Depending on which side you press,
the system scans upward or down-
ward from the current frequency. It
stops when it finds a station with a
strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. When the system is
intheSCANmode,SCNshowsin
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for about five
seconds. If you do nothing, the
system will then scan for the next
strong station and play that for five
seconds. When it plays a station that
you want to continue listening to,
press the SCAN button again.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN
Preset
127
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
AUTO SELECT
128
SEEK BAR
SCAN BUTTON
A.SEL BUTTON TUNE KNOB
AUTO SELECT INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFAdtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob. Each mode is shown in
the display as it changes.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAd by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob. The displayed number
shows you the current setting. When
the adjustment level reaches the
center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The
displayed number shows you the
current setting. When the
adjustment level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘ ’’.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
129
Adjustment Level
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The display of your audio system
usually shows the time when the
ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (I)
or ON (II). It shows the operation
mode of the radio or CD player when
you operate them, and goes back to
the time display after five seconds.
If an error occurs while operating
the CD player or optional CD
changer, the display will keep
showing the error code and will not
switch to the time display until the
error is corrected (see pages and
).
148
149
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
Digital Clock
130
R BUTTONH BUTTON
M BUTTON
CLOCK BUTTONTIME DISPLAY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can use the R (Preset 6) button
to quickly set the time to the nearest
hour. Press the R button while
pressing the CLOCK button. If the
displayed time is before the half
hour, pressing R sets the clock back
to the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, pressing
R sets the clock forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the time
setting will be lost. To set the time
again, follow the setting procedure.
To set the hour, press the H (Preset
4) button while pressing the CLOCK
(SCAN/RPT) button. Press and hold
the H button until the hour advances
to the desired time.
To set the minute, press the M
(Preset 5) button while pressing the
CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button. Press
andholdtheMbuttonuntilthe
minute numbers advance to the
desired time.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For information, see page .
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
77
143
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Audio System Lighting
Operating the CD Player
132
EJECT BUTTONCD SLOT
CD BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB SEEK/SKIP BAR
A.SEL/RDM BUTTON
RAMDOM INDICATOR
REPEAT INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play the disc again.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdtheSEEK/SKIPbar.Press
the side to move forward. You
will see CUE in the display. Press the
side to move backward. You
will see REW displayed. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the A. SEL/RDM button.
You will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing A. SEL/RDM again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
A Compact Disc changer is available
foryourvehicle.Itholdsuptosix
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
To select a different disc, use the
Preset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6
(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6
button to select the next disc in the
magazine. Press the Preset 5 button
to select the previous disc. If you
select an empty slot in the magazine,
the changer will, after finding that
slot empty, try to load the CD in the
next slot. This continues until it finds
a CD to load and play.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
playing, the system will automatically
switch to the CD changer and begin
play where it left off. If there are no
CDs in the changer, the display will
flash. You will have to select another
mode (AM or FM) with the button.
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.150
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
134
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
SolutionCauseIndication
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
CD Player Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
135
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Cause SolutionIndication
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
Magazine
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD Magazine in the
CD Changer
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
136
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).152
On EX models
Audio System
AM/FM/CD Player Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM/FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broad-
castinginstereo.Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset buttons.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the Radio
138
SEEK BUTTONS
SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB
PWR/VOL KNOB
AM BUTTON
FM BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick the preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Stop turning the knob when the dis-
play reaches the desired frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
either SEEK button ( or ),
then release it. Depending on which
SEEK button you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. When the system is
intheSCANmode,SCNshowsin
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for about five
seconds. If you do nothing, the
system will then scan for the next
strong station and play that for five
seconds. When it plays a station that
you want to continue listening to,
press the SCAN button again.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
1.
4.
3.
2.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN
Preset
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AUTO SELECT
140
A.SEL BUTTON
AUTO SELECT INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Subwoofer, Treble, Bass, Fader, and
Balance are each adjustable. You
select which of these you want to
adjust by pressing the TUNE knob.
ThemodechangesfromSUB-Wto
BAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,and
then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
Use
these modes to adjust the tone to
your liking. Select SUB-W, TRE, or
BAS by pressing the TUNE knob.
Adjust the desired mode by turning
the TUNE knob. The displayed
number show you the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob. The displayed number
shows you the current setting. When
the adjustment level reaches the
center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Adjusting the Sound
Sub-woofer/Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
141
TUNE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The audio system display shows the
time when the ignition switch is in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
When you are finished, press the
CLOCK (TUNE) button again.
To set the clock, press and hold the
CLOCK (TUNE) button until the
numbers flash. Change the hour by
pressing the H button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minute by pressing the
M button until the numbers advance
to the desired time.
You can use the R button to quickly
set the time to the nearest hour. If
the displayed time is before the half
hour, pressing R sets the clock back
to the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, pressing
R sets the clock forward to the begin-
ning of the next hour.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Digital Clock
142
H BUTTON
CLOCK
BUTTON
M BUTTON
R BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Your Honda’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
How well your Honda’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmos-
pheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
77
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System Lighting
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
143
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
144
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. In all
cases, play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Player
145
PWR/VOL KNOB
SKIP BUTTONSA.SEL/RDM BUTTON
CD BUTTON
CD SLOTEJECT BUTTON RANDOM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play the disc again.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the A. SEL/RDM button.
You will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing A. SEL/RDM again.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM or
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold an appropriate SKIP button.
Press button to move forward,
or the button to move backward.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
Each time you press the button
and release it, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track. Press and release the
buttontoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
and release it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
146
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
A Compact Disc changer is available
foryourvehicle.Itholdsuptosix
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
playing, the system will automatically
switch to the CD changer and begin
play where it left off. If there are no
CDs in the changer, the display will
flash. You will have to select another
mode (AM or FM) with the button.
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
To select a different disc, use the
Preset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6
(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6
button to select the next disc in the
magazine. Press the Preset 5 button
to select the previous disc. If you
select an empty slot in the magazine,
the changer will, after finding that
slot empty, try to load the CD in the
next slot. This continues until it finds
a CD to load and play.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Audio System
CD Player Error Indications
Comfort and Convenience Features
148
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
Magazine
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD Magazine in the
CD Changer
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
149
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player.
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
150
Main Menu
Table of Contents
An auxiliary input jack is located on
the dashboard next to the accessory
power socket.
Your audio system will accept
auxiliary inputs from a portable
cassette player, CD changer, MP3
player, etc. To use the jack, turn
down the volume of the audio unit
and the portable unit. Then pivot the
cover up, plug in a mini-jack cable
between the portable unit and the
jack, and press the AUX button on
the audio unit.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Honda dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the
frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou
turn on the system. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code.
For example if your code is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4,
5,’’ press the 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 preset
buttons. If the code is entered
correctly, the radio will start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when
power was disconnected.
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, the user
must enter a specific five-digit code
in the preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
On EX models
Theft Protection
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
152
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Push in the Cruise Control Master
Switch to the left of the steering
column. The indicator in the
switch will light.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the vehicle under
those conditions.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
On EX models Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
153
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
light on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE
CONTROL light on the instrument
panel comes on.
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. The vehicle will accelerate.
When you reach the desired
cruising speed, release the button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button repeatedly. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will
speed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the SET/DECEL
button.
3.
Changing the Set Speed
Comfort and Convenience Features
Cruise Control
154
RESUME/ACCEL
SET/DECEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal will cause the cruise
control to cancel.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin
any of these ways:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master
Switch.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. The vehicle will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button. The vehicle will
then maintain the desired speed.
CONTINUED
Cancelling the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
155
CANCEL BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to
.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out and the
vehicle will begin to slow down. You
can use the accelerator pedal in the
normal way.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light comes on,
and the vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
Using the
Cruise Control
156
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin driving your Honda,
youshouldknowwhatgasolineto
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your vehicle,
please read the information in this
section first.
.............................Break-in Period . 158
.........................................Gasoline . 158
.........Service Station Procedures . 159
................Filling the Fuel Tank . 159
....................Opening the Hood . 160
...............................Oil Check . 162
.........Engine Coolant Check . 163
...............................Fuel Economy . 164
.....................Vehicle Condition . 164
...........................Driving Habits . 164
...Accessories and Modifications . 165
.............................Carrying Cargo . 167
Before Driving
Before Driving
157
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Your Honda is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 86 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise in the engine that can lead to
mechanical damage.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emission control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Honda dealer for service.
Youshouldfollowthesesamere-
commendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are relined.
Do not change the oil until the
recommended time or mileage
intervalshowninthemaintenance
schedule.
Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km).
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Break-in Period, Gasoline
Before Driving
Break-in Period Gasoline
158
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Your vehicle has an on-board
refueling vapor recovery system to
help keep fuel vapors from going
into the atmosphere. If the fuel
nozzle keeps clicking off even
though the tank is not full, there
maybeaproblemwiththissystem.
Consult your dealer.
Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, park
with that side closest to the
service station pumps.
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
out the notched edge.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Filling the Fuel Tank
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
159
FUEL FILL CAP
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page ).
Standing in front of the vehicle,
put your fingers between the front
edge of the hood and the front
grille. The hood latch handle is
above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this
handle up until it releases the
hood. Lift the hood.
Push the fuel fill door closed.
1. 2.
5.
6.
292
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Opening the Hood
160
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you can open the hood without
lifting the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page ).
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender,thenletitdrop.
After closing the hood, make sure it
is securely latched.
Pull the support rod out of its clip
and insert the end into the hole in
the hood.
3.
237
CONTINUED
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
161
SUPPORT ROD
CLIP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait a
few minutes after turning the engine
off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert it all the way back in its tube.2.
1.
3.
Oil Check
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
162
DIPSTICK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
on checking other items in your
Honda.
4.
219
225
212
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Adding Oil
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Engine Coolant Check
163
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MAX
MIN
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always maintain your vehicle accord-
ing to the maintenance schedule.
This will keep it in top operating
condition.
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceler-
ation, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
The condition of your vehicle and
your driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cto
cut down on air conditioning use.
Use the flow-through ventilation
when the outside air temperature is
moderate.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and acceler-
ate smoothly.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your vehicle’s underside adds weight
and rolling resistance. Frequent
cleaning helps your fuel mileage and
reduces the chance of corrosion.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
An important part of that mainte-
nance is the
(see page ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
219
Vehicle Condition
Driving Habits
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
164
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
anyaccessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Non-Honda accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on page for
additional information.) If possible, have your dealer inspect
the final installation.
Have the installer contact your
Honda dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ).
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Before installing any accessory:
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your vehicle’s electrical system
capacity, they can interfere with the
operation of your vehicle, or even
cause the airbags to deploy.
299
166
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
165
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Honda
seat cover for example, could
prevent the side airbag from
inflating properly.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with non-
Honda (aftermarket) components
could seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to impact speed
bumps or other raised objects,
which could cause the airbags to
deploy.
Raising the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Aftermarket wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult with your Honda dealer.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Modifications
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a f ront door.
Do not place any objects over the
outsideedgeof afrontseat-back.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
166
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the doors and seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The cargo area is intended for larger,
heavier items. In addition, the back
seats can be folded or removed to
allow you to carry more cargo or
longer items.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
167
CARGO AREA SIDE POCKET
GLOVE BOXCARGO AREA
DOOR POCKETS
SEAT-BACK POCKET (EX)
CEILING POCKET (EX)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
×
−
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
675 lbs (308 kg).
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if there will be four 150
lbs (70 kg) occupants in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 75 lbs (34
kg).
4 150 lbs (70 kg) = 600 lbs (280
kg)
675 lbs (308 kg) 600 lbs (280 kg) =
75 lbs (34 kg)
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(Four is the seating capacity of
your vehicle.)
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 675 lbs
(308 kg)’’ on your vehicle’s placard
(on the driver’s doorjamb).
The maximum load limit for your
vehicle is 675 lbs (308 kg). This
figure includes the total weight of all
occupants, cargo, accessories, and
the tongue weight if you are towing a
trailer.
Following are the steps for
determining the correct cargo and
luggage load limit.
Determine the combined weight
of accessories, luggage, and cargo
beingloadedinthevehicle.The
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4 [75
lbs(34kg)inthisexample].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Load Limit
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
168
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you can carry any items on a
roof rack, be sure the total weight
of the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your Honda
dealer for further information.
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate or the hatch, exhaust gas
can enter the passenger area. To
avoid the possibility of
, follow the
instructions on page .
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop. 60
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
carbon
monoxide poisoning
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
169
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To secure cargo, use the four cargo
hooks in the cargo area floor. There
is another hook on each side wall
near the hatch. Make sure all stored
items are secured before driving.
Carrying Cargo
Cargo Hooks
Before Driving
170
HOOKS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
5-speed manual and automatic
transmissions. It also includes
important information on parking
your vehicle, the braking system,
and facts you need if you are plan-
ning to tow a trailer or drive off-
highway.
........................Driving Guidelines . 172
........................Preparing to Drive . 173
.......................Starting the Engine . 174
Starting in Cold Weather
....................at High Altitude . 175
....5-speed Manual Transmission . 176
.....Recommended Shift Points . 177
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 177
..............Automatic Transmission . 178
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 178
................Shift Lever Positions . 179
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 182
....................Shift Lock Release . 183
...........................................Parking . 184
.....................The Braking System . 185
.............Brake Wear Indicators . 185
...............Brake System Design . 186
.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 186
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 187
........................ABS Indicator . 188
...............Driving in Bad Weather . 189
...........................Towing a Trailer . 191
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
................................Motorhome . 198
..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 200
.................General Information . 200
Important Safety
............................Precautions . 201
...............................Driving Tips . 202
Driving
Driving
171
Main Menu
Theseadvantagescomeatsomecost.
Because your vehicle is taller and
rides higher off the ground, it has a
high center of gravity. This means
that your vehicle can tip or roll over
if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
To prevent the risk of rollover or
loss of control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Your Element has higher ground
clearance than a passenger vehicle
designed only for use on pavement.
Higher ground clearance has many
advantages for off-highway driving.
It allows you to travel over bumps
and unpaved roads. It also provides
good visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Your Element is equipped with a
unique four-wheel drive (4WD)
system. Normally, power is delivered
only to the front wheels. When the
system senses a loss of front-wheel
traction, it automatically transfers
some power to the rear wheels. This
gives you better traction and
mobility.
While this system can provide
increasedtractiononslippery
surfaces, you still need to exercise
thesamecarewhenaccelerating,
steering, and braking that you would
in a two-wheel drive vehicle.
See page for additional guidelines
for driving off-highway.
Four-wheel Drive Models
200
Driving Guidelines
Driving
172
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
Start the engine (see page ).
Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page ).
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
Make sure the doors, the hatch,
and the tailgate are securely
closed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Check that the hood, tailgate, and
hatch are fully closed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
17
65
92
106
82
174
Driving
Preparing to Drive
173
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way. START (III) does not
function unless the clutch pedal is
pressed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Manual Transmission:
Automatic Transmission:
Driving
Starting the Engine
174
Main Menu
Table of Contents
An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet
(2,400 meters) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure:
Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Push the accelerator pedal half-
way to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
3.
2.
1.
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
Starting the Engine
Driving
175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The manual transmission is syn-
chronizedinallforwardgearsfor
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from Fifth
to Reverse. When shifting up or
down,makesureyoupushtheclutch
pedal down all the way, shift to the
next gear, and let the pedal up
gradually. When you are not shifting,
do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal. This can cause your clutch to
wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift
into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
Reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into Reverse, or shift into
one of the forward gears for a
moment. This stops the gears so
they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure engine speed will not go
into the tachometer’s red zone in the
lower gear.
5-speed Manual Transmission
Driving
176
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you the best
fuel economy and effective emis-
sions control. The following shift
points are recommended:
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
48 mph (77 km/h)
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
Driving
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter
5-speed Manual Transmission
177
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda’s transmission has four
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
This indicator on the instrument
panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission. Avoid
rapid acceleration and have the trans-
missioncheckedbyanauthorized
Honda dealer as soon as possible.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Driving
Automatic Transmission
178
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
The shift lever has six positions. It
must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, 2, 1, N, or R, press firmly on the
brake pedal, and keep your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
YoucannotshiftoutofParkwiththe
brake pedal pressed when the
ignition switch is in LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I).
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the side of the shift lever
to move it out of park.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoN
NtoD
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoN
NtoR
RtoP
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Shift Lever Positions
Park (P)
179
SHIFT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-
tion if you need to leave the vehicle
for any reason. Press on the brake pe-
dal when you are moving the shift
lever from Neutral to another gear.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
.
Your vehicle has a reverse lockout so
you cannot accidentally shift to
Reverse when the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift. Press the release button
before shifting into Reverse from
Neutral.
If you cannot shift to Reverse when
the vehicle is stopped, press the
brake pedal, and slowly shift to
Neutral. Then press the release
button, and shift to Reverse.
If there is a problem in the reverse
lockout system, or your vehicle’s
battery is disconnected or goes dead,
you cannot shift to Reverse. (Refer
to Shift Lock Release on page ).
183
183
Neutral (N)
Reverse (R)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
180
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmis-
sion automatically selects a suitable
gear for your speed and acceleration.
You may notice the transmission
shifting up at higher speeds when
the engine is cold. This helps the
engine warm up faster.
For faster acceleration, you can get
the transmission to automatically
downshift by pushing the accelerator
pedal to the floor. The transmission
will shift down one or two gears,
depending on your speed. Overdrive (O/D) is on whenever you
turn the ignition ON (II). You can
turn it off by pressing the O/D
switch on the end of the shift lever.
The O/D OFF indicator on the
instrument panel next to the shift
lever ‘‘D’’ position indicator will come
on.
Pressing the O/D switch again turns
the overdrive mode back on.
Overdrive can be turned on or off
only when the ignition switch is ON
(II) and the shift lever is in the D
position. Overdrive mode turns on
every time you start the engine, even
if you turned it off the last time you
drove the vehicle.
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Drive (D)
Overdrive (O/D) Mode
181
OVERDRIVE OFF INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
The O/D OFF indicator also comes
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON(II).
When overdrive is off, the
transmission selects only the first
three gears. Turn the O/D off to
provide engine braking when going
down a steep hill. You can also avoid
the transmission from cycling
between third and fourth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
To shift to Second,
pressthereleasebuttonontheside
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop. Second
gives you more power when climbing,
and increased engine braking when
going down steep hills. Use second
gear when starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow. It will help
reduce wheelspin.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
To shift from Second to
First, press the release button on the
side of the shift lever. With the lever
in this position, the transmission
locks in first gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, and D,
you can operate this transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.
If you shift into First when the
vehiclespeedisabove31mph(50
km/h), the transmission shifts into
second gear first to avoid sudden
engine braking.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Second (2)
Engine Speed LimiterFirst (1)
182
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal does not work. This procedure
is also used to release the Reverse
Lockout.
Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to
theshiftlever.Useasmallflat-
tipped screwdriver or small metal
plate (neither are included in the
tool kit) to remove the cover.
Carefully pry on the edge of the
cover.
To release the Reverse Lockout,
make sure the ignition switch is in
the ACCESSORY(I) position.
Make sure the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) position.
Set the Parking brake.
Insert a screwdriver in the Shift
Lock Release slot.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your Honda
dealer.
Push down on the screwdriver
while you press the release button
on the side of the shift lever and
move the shift lever out of Park to
Neutral.
To release the Reverse Lockout,
move the shift lever from Neutral
to Reverse, then to Park.
Remove the screwdriver from the
Shift Lock Release slot, then
install a new cover. Make sure the
notchonthecoverisontheright
side. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
Driving
183
COVER
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. The indicator
on the instrument panel shows that
the parking brake is not fully
released; it does not indicate that the
parking brake is firmly set. Make
sure the parking brake is set firmly
or your vehicle may roll if it is
parked on an incline.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission making it easier to
move the shift lever out of Park
when you want to drive away.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the curb.
If you have a manual transmission,
putitinfirstgear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels toward the curb. If
you have a manual transmission, put
it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Turn off the lights.
Lock the doors and the hatch with
the key.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Make sure the skylight and the
windows are closed.
Parking Tips
Driving
Parking
184
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Your Honda is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS (on
vehicles equipped with ABS) helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brake wear indicators. The
indicators make a very audible
‘‘screeching.’’
Brake Wear Indicators
The Braking System
Driving
185
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the vehicle
continues straight ahead even
though you turn the steering wheel.
The ABS helps to prevent lock-up
and helps you retain steering control
by pumping the brakes rapidly; much
faster than a person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
ABS helps to prevent the wheels
from locking up and skidding during
hard braking, allowing you to retain
steering control.
Standard on EX models
Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes
The Braking System
Driving
186
Front
Main Menu
Table of Contents
this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal; it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
it only helps with steering
control during braking. You should
always maintain a safe following
distance from other vehicles.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
CONTINUED
You should never pump the
brake pedal; ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle;
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Important Safety Reminders
The Braking System
Driving
187
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without anti-
lock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your vehicle as soon as
possible.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
68
294
ABS Indicator
The Braking System
Driving
188
ABS INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your vehicle longer
to react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills.
Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the wind-
shield washer reservoir full of the
proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defrosters and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
page ).
Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-
quire a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your vehicle well-
maintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these condi-
tions.
124
CONTINUED
Driving Technique Visibility
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
189
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
askid.
Be very cautious when passing, or
beingpassedbyothervehicles.The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Traction
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
190
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control.
The total
weight of the trailer and
everything loaded in it must not
exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towing
a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
CONTINUED
Tongue Load:
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight:
Towing a Trailer
Driving
191
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, the
tongue load must not exceed:
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
on the front axle
on the rear axle
and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Towing a Trailer
Driving
192
4,450 lbs (2,020 kg)
2,300 lbs (1,045 kg)
2,205 lbs (1,000 kg)
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, and
how much load you are towing.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Always use safety chains. Make sure
they are secured to both the trailer
and hitch, and that they cross under
the tongue so they can catch the
trailer if it becomes unhitched.
Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do
not let the chains drag on the ground.
CONTINUED
Checking Loads Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Hitches
Saf ety Chains
Towing a Trailer
Driving
193
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard. All states and Canadian provinces
require some type of trailer lights.
Check requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow.
If you use a converter, you can get
the connector and pins that mate
with the connector in your vehicle
from your Honda dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary in
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting
connector located behind the right
side panel in the cargo area. Refer to
thedrawingaboveforthewiring
color code and purpose of each pin.
Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
Driving
194
GROUND
(BLACK)
BACK-UP LIGHT
(GREEN/BLACK)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/RED)
TAILLIGHT
(RED/YELLOW)
BRAKE LIGHT
(WHITE/BLACK)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/YELLOW)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages and ).
If you tow frequently, follow the
Severe Conditions maintenance
schedule.
192191
250
Additional Trailer Equipment
Pre-Tow Checklist
Towing a Trailer
Driving
195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
discussed below.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Ifyoumuststopwhenfacinguphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use the overdrive
(O/D) mode when towing a trailer
on level roads. Turn off the
overdrive (O/D) mode when towing
a trailer in hilly terrain (see page
). (See ‘‘ ’’ in the
next column for additional gear
information.)
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently between 3rd and 4th
gears while going up a hill, turn off
the overdrive (O/D) mode (see page
).
181
181
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Driving on Hills
Making Turns and Braking
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving on Hills
196
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large vehicle, keep a constant speed
and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 3rd
gear on the manual transmission,
and turn off the overdrive (O/D)
mode on the automatic transmission.
Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
bottom
Parking
Backing Up
Handling Crosswinds and Buf feting
Driving
Towing a Trailer
197
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When purchasing a tow bar, make
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow
the manufacturer’s attachment
instructions carefully.
Your Element can be towed behind a
motorhome at legal highway speeds
up to 65 mph(100 km/h). Do not
exceed 65 mph (100km/h).
Otherwise, severe transmission
damage will occur. To avoid damage
to the 4WD system, it must be towed
with all four wheels on the ground
(flat towing).
After attaching the tow bar to your
motorhome, do the following to
prepare your Element for ‘‘flat
towing’’:
When preparing to tow your
Element, make sure the
transmission is filled to the correct
level (see page ). Do not
overfill.
When preparing to tow your Element,
make sure the transmission is full of
fluid (see page ). Maintaining
the correct level is very important.
Do not overfill. Do the following
Follow the procedure exactly.
Otherwise, severe automatic
transmission damage will occur.
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to Neutral.
Leave the key in the ignition
switch and the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) so the steering
wheel does not lock. Make sure
the radio and any items plugged
into the accessory power sockets
are turned off so you do not run
down the battery.
232
231
every day immediately before you begin
towing.
5-speed Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Driving
198
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Start the engine.
Press on the brake pedal. Shift the
lever through all the positions (P,
R, N, D, 2, 1)
ShifttoD,thentoN.Letthe
engine run for three minutes, then
turn off the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) so the steering
wheel does not lock. Make sure
the radio and any items plugged
into the accessory power sockets
are turned off so you do not run
down the battery.
If you tow more than 8 hours in one
day, you should repeat the above
procedure at least every 8 hours.
(when you stop for fuel, etc.)
If you tow a Element with an
automatic transmission, the
transmission fluid must be changed
every two years or 30,000 miles
(48,000 km), whichever comes first.
Extended Towing
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Driving
199
Failure to follow the above instructions
exactly will result in severe automatic
transmission damage. If you cannot
shift the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported on a flat-bed truck or
trailer.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
freely before you begin towing.
Severe automatic transmission damage
will occur if the vehicle is shifted from
reverse to neutral and then towed with
the drive wheels on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Element has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,
and similar locations. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging off-
road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your Element will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. So be sure to read this
owner’s manual, pay special attention
to the precautions and tips in this
section, and get acquainted with
your vehicle before you leave the
pavement.
General Information
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
200
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To avoid loss of control
or rollover, be sure to follow all
recommendations and precautions
on page and in this section.
Seat belts are just as important off-
road as on paved roads. Wherever
you drive, make sure you and your
passengers always wear seat belts. If
children or infants are along for the
ride, see that they are properly
secured. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt.
On many unpaved roads, you won’t
find lane markers, traffic signals, or
signs to warn you of possible trouble
ahead. It’s up to you to continually
assess the situation and drive within
limits.
The route presents limits (some
roads are too steep and bumpy for
example). You have limits (in driving
skills and comfort). And your vehicle
also has limits (traction, stability, and
power, for instance).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take proper precautions.
For example, you can have an
accident or rollover during
maneuvers such as turning, driving
on hills, or over large obstacles.
Remember that your Element has
higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than
passenger vehicles designed for use
only on pavement. This means your
vehicle can more easily tip or roll
over if you make abrupt turns or
drive on slopes.
Be sure to store cargo properly, and
do not exceed your Element’s cargo
or trailer load limits (see pages
and ).
172
168 191
Important Safety Precautions
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
201
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in the owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe. Check
the tires for damage and for proper
pressure.
Driving off-highway can be hard on a
vehicle. Before you leave the
pavement, be sure all scheduled
maintenance and service has been
done, and that you have inspected
your vehicle. Pay special attention to
the condition of the tires, and use a
gauge to check the tire pressures.
The following pages contain practical
tips on basic off-highway operation.
Off-highway, the general rule is to
keep your speed low. Of course,
you’ll need enough speed to keep
moving forward. But at higher
speeds, you have less time to assess
conditions and make good decisions.
There’s also a greater chance of
sliding if you brake or turn too
quickly on wet soil, gravel, or ice. In
any situation, never go faster than
conditions allow.
Forbettertractiononallsurfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway. You may even dig
yourself into a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second gear (2) will
help get you to a smooth start on
snow and ice.
Generally, the best off-pavement
braking technique is to gently
depress the brake pedal, then
increase pressure as more braking is
needed. Avoid hard braking. Keep in
mind that you will usually need more
time and distance to brake to a stop
on unpaved surfaces.
If you need to brake hard because of
an emergency, apply steady, even
pressure to the brake pedal. Do not
pump the brakes; let the anti-lock
braking system pump them for you.
If you pump the brakes, the anti-lock
cannot work as efficiently, and your
stopping distance may be increased.
With ABS
Driving Tips
Check Out Your Vehicle
Controlling Speed
Accelerating and Braking
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Bumps, holes, rocks, and other
obstacles can be hazardous. Debris
in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Even small rocks can cut your tires.
More important, because your
vehicle has a high center of gravity,
driving over a large obstacle, or
allowing a wheel to drop into a deep
hole, can cause your vehicle to tip or
roll over.
Drive slow enough to observe
obstacles ahead and maneuver
around them. If you can’t avoid a
serious obstacle, turn around and
look for a better route.
Before driving up or down a hill, stop
and assess the situation. If you can’t
clearly see all road conditions (good
traction, no bumps, holes, or other
obstacles, a safe way out, etc.) walk
the slope before you drive on it. If
you have any doubt about whether
you can safely drive on the slope,
. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue (because of
the steepness, a large obstacle, etc.),
. Your vehicle
could roll over. Slowly back down the
hill, following the same route you
took up the hill.
You should have no problem making
sharp turns at low speed on level
ground. But never make an abrupt
turn at higher speeds, on or off
pavement. With a higher center of
gravity, your vehicle can more easily
tip or roll over.
Off-highway, the basic turning
technique is to drive at low speed
and gradually adjust the amount of
steering to suit the surface.
Test your brakes from time to time
to make sure they are operating
properly. This will also give you a
feel for how much traction you have
on a given surface.
don’t do it
do not try to turn around
Avoiding ObstaclesDriving on Slopes
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
Turning
203
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Avoid driving through deep water. If
you encounter water in your route (a
small stream or large puddle, for
example), evaluate it carefully before
going ahead. Make sure it is shallow,
flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of
the depth or the ground, turn around
andfindanotherroute.
Driving through deep water can also
damage your vehicle. The water can
get into the transmission and
differential, diluting the lubricant
and causing an eventual failure. It
can also wash the grease out of the
wheel bearings.
You should never use a jack to try
getting unstuck. A jack only works
on firm, level ground. Also, your
vehicle could easily slip off the jack
and hurt you or someone else.
Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,
or other surfaces where you could
get stuck. If you do happen to get
stuck because of inclement weather
or other conditions, choose a safe
and appropriate course of action.
If You Encounter Water
If You Get Stuck
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
204
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you spin the wheels excessively
trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat the components of the
4-wheel drive system. If this happens,
the 4-wheel drive system shuts off
and only the front wheels receive
power. If this happens, stop and
allow everything to cool down. The
4-wheel drive system will work again
after its temperature drops.
If you slip the clutch for a long time
while trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat and damage it.
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
4-Wheel Drive Vehicles
205
Main Menu
Table of Contents
206
Main Menu
This section explains the importance
of keeping your vehicle well
maintained and why you should
follow basic maintenance safety
precautions.
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instruc-
tions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to per-
form more complex maintenance
tasks on your Honda, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Honda
dealer.
......................Maintenance Safety . 208
.Important Safety Precautions . 209
.................Maintenance Schedule . 210
...Required Maintenance Record . 217
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 219
..............................Fluid Locations . 220
......................................Engine Oil . 221
..................................Adding Oil . 221
....................Recommended Oil . 221
..............................Synthetic Oil . 222
....................................Additives . 222
.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 223
.............................Cooling System . 225
............Adding Engine Coolant . 225
.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 227
....................Windshield Washers . 230
.......................Transmission Fluid . 231
..........Automatic Transmission . 231
5-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 232
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 233
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 234
............................Brake System . 234
...........................Clutch System . 235
..............................Power Steering . 235
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 236
....................................Hood Latch . 237
....................................Spark Plugs . 238
..............................Replacement . 238
............................Specifications . 239
...........................................Battery . 240
.................................Wiper Blades . 242
..............Air Conditioning System . 245
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 246
.......................................Drive Belt . 248
...............................................Tires . 249
......................................Inflation . 249
Recommended Tire
Pressures for Normal
...........................Driving . 250
..................................Inspection . 251
..............................Maintenance . 251
.............................Tire Rotation . 252
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 253
......................Wheels and Tires . 254
..........................Winter Driving . 254
.............................Snow Tires . 254
............................Tire Chains . 255
.............................................Lights . 256
.....................Headlight Aiming . 258
........................Replacing Bulbs . 258
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 266
323
Maintenance
Maintenance
207
Main Menu
Regularly maintaining your vehicle is
the best way to protect your
investment. Proper maintenance is
essential to your safety and the
safety of your passengers. It will also
reward you with more economical,
trouble-free driving, and help reduce
air pollution.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by a Honda
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Maintenance
Maintenance Safety
208
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your vehicle is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless in-
structed to do so.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury f rom moving parts.
209
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
vehicle as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your
vehicle serviced and what things
need attention. It is essential that
you have your vehicle serviced as
scheduled to retain its high level of
safety, dependability, and emissions
control performance.
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s
load limit. This puts excess stress
on the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your vehicle. The
load limit is shown on the label on
the driver’s doorjamb.
Operate your vehicle on
reasonable roads within the legal
speed limit.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
theproperoctanerating(seepage
).
Service your vehicle according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions if you drive your vehicle
MAINLY under one or more of the
following conditions.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less than 10
miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot [over
90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long periods of
stop-and-go driving.
Trailer towing, driving with a roof
rack, or driving in mountainous
conditions.158
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Which Schedule to Follow:
U.S. Owners
210
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
−
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Honda
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
We recommend the use of genuine
Honda parts and fluids whenever you
have maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-
iced roads.
NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY
or NEVER, drive under a ‘‘severe’’
condition, you should follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Normal
Conditions.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions.
Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Canadian Owners
211
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
Maintenance
212
Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
10
16
50
80
70
112
110
176
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
20
32
30
48
40
64
60
96
80
128
100
160
Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Service the following items at the recommended intervals.
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)
Replace engine oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Inspect and adjust drive belt
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect idle speed
Replace rear differential fluid (4WD)
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
90
144
Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years
120
192
24 48 7212 36 60
M/T
A/T
:
: 211
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＃
Maintenance
213
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
A, B, C, D
A
B
C
D
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.
Replace engine oil.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 252 ).
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Inspect and adjust drive belt.
Replace dust and pollen filter.
Replace air cleaner element every 30,000 mi/48,000
km (independent of time).
10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr
20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr
30,000 mi/48,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs
3yrs
50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs
60,000 mi/96,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs
80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs
100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km
6yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in D.
Do items in A, C.
Do items in A, B.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do items in A.
Do item in D.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in D.
Do items in A, C.
Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).
Do items in A, B.
Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.
Replace spark plugs.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do items in A.
Do item in D.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then
replace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Replace engine coolant, then replace every
60,000mi/96,000km/5 yrs.
Inspect idle speed.
:
212
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
NOTE:
211
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＃
＃＃
＊
Maintenance
214
Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
10
16
50
80
70
112
110
176
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km) or 2 years
20
32
30
48
40
64
80
128
100
160
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) in dusty conditions,
otherwise use normal schedule
Service the following items at the recommended intervals.
60
96
90
144
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)
Replace engine oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear, box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect the following items:
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system, Fuel lines, and connections
Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody
Inspect and adjust drive belt
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace transmission fluid
Replace rear differential fluid (4WD)
Inspect idle speed
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years
120
192
24 48 7212 36 60
M/T
A/T
:
:
246
211
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＊
CONTINUED
Maintenance
215
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
A, B, C, D, E
A
B
C
D
E
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.
Replace engine oil.
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 252 ).
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches with
multipurpose grease.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Check all lights.
Inspect the underbody.
Inspect and adjust drive belt.
Replace dust and pollen filter .
Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 mi/
24,000 km (independent of time) under dusty
conditions, otherwise use Normal Conditions
schedule.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, E.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
DoitemsinA,B,D.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A, E.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, E.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
DoitemsinA,B,D.
5,000 mi/8,000 km
10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr
15,000 mi/24,000 km
20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr
25,000 mi/40,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
35,000 mi/56,000 km
40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km
3yrs
50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs
55,000 mi/88,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
65,000 mi/104,000 km
70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs
75,000 mi/120,000 km
80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs
85,000 mi/136,000 km
90,000 mi/144,000 km
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs
212
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＊
＃
Maintenance
216
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information
under special driving conditions.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
NOTE:
:
:
246
211
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A, E.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.
Replace spark plugs.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Do item in E.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Replace engine coolant, then replace every
60,000mi/96,000km/5 yrs.
Inspect idle speed.
95,000 mi/152,000 km
100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs
105,000 mi/168,000 km
6yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km
110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs
115,000 mi/184,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs
9yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
217
5,000 mi
10,000 mi
15,000 mi
20,000 mi
25,000 mi
30,000 mi
35,000 mi
40,000 mi
45,000 mi
50,000 mi
55,000 mi
60,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
8,000 km
16,000 km
24,000 km
32,000 km
(or 1 year)
40,000 km
48,000 km
56,000 km
64,000 km
(or 2 years)
72,000 km
80,000 km
88,000 km
96,000 km
(or 3 years)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
212
214
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
218
65,000 mi
70,000 mi
75,000 mi
80,000 mi
85,000 mi
90,000 mi
95,000 mi
100,000 mi
105,000 mi
110,000 mi
115,000 mi
120,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
104,000 km
112,000 km
120,000 km
128,000 km
(or 4 years)
136,000 km
144,000 km
152,000 km
160,000 km
(or 5 years)
168,000 km
176,000 km
184,000 km
192,000 km
(or 6 years)
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Windshield washer fluid Check
the level in the reservoir monthly.
If weather conditions cause you to
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page .
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate light monthly. See
page .
162
163
231
234
256
230
251
Owner Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
219
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
220
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
POWER STEERING
FLUID
(Red cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
RADIATOR CAP
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
CLUTCH FLUID
(5-speed Manual
Transmission only)
(Gray cap)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection.
Pour the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
CONTINUED
Recommended OilAdding Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
221
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The oil’s viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
Select the oil for your vehicle
according to this chart.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight as shown
on the chart. When using synthetic
oil, you must follow the oil and filter
change intervals given in the
maintenance schedule.
Your Honda does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your Honda, to
improve cold weather starting, and
to help your engine use less fuel.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
Synthetic Oil
Additives
222
Ambient Temperature
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
Honda dealer) is required to
remove the filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
accordingtothetimeanddistance
(miles/kilometers) recommenda-
tions in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contami-
nants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
1.
2.
4.
3.
CONTINUED
Changing the Oil and Filter
Engine Oil
Maintenance
223
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
OIL FILTER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and reinspect your
work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
224
33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
The coolant you add should always
be a mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water. It
does not require any additional
mixing. If it is not available, you may
use another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any non-
Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
1.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
225
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Turn the radiator cap counter-
clockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Pour the coolant slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled coolant
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cooling System
Maintenance
226
RADIATOR CAP
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Thecoolingsystemshouldbe
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the vehicle.
Unless you have the tools and
knowledge, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn
the heater temperature control
dial fully clockwise. Turn the
ignition off.
Openthehood.Makesurethe
engine and radiator are cool to the
touch.
Remove the radiator cap. Loosen the drain plug on the
bottom of the radiator. The
coolant will drain through the
splash guard.1.
2.
3. 4.
Replacing Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
227
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the reserve tank
mounting bolt with a wrench, and
remove the reserve tank from its
bottom holder by pulling it up
while rotating it about 360° to
avoid hitting the fan shroud.
Drain the coolant, then put the
tank back in its holder. Reinstall
the reserve tank mounting bolt
and tighten it securely.
When the coolant stops draining,
tightenthedrainplugatthe
bottom of the radiator.
Pour Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing
is not required.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Cooling System
Maintenance
228
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
Remove the radiator cap. Fill the
radiator with coolant up to the
base of the filler neck.
Start the engine and hold it at
1,500 rpm until the radiator fan
comes on. Turn off the engine.
Check the coolant level in the
radiator and add coolant if needed.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
If necessary, fill the reserve tank
to the MAX mark. Install the
reserve tank cap.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
Start the engine and let it run for
about 30 seconds. Then turn off
the engine.
Check the level in the radiator,
add coolant if needed.
The cooling system capacity is:
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
With automatic transmission:
With manual transmission:
Maintenance
Cooling System
229
1.43 US gal (5.4 )
1.45 US gal (5.5
)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
duringnormaluse.Inbadweather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you
stop for fuel. This reservoir
supplies the windshield and rear
window washers.
The windshield washer reservoir
is located behind the passenger’s
side headlight. Check the
reservoir’s fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge attached to the cap.
The low washer level indicator will
light when the level is low (see
page ).
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
69
On Canadian models
Maintenance
Windshield Washers
230
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s
paint, while a vinegar/water solution
can damage the windshield washer
pump.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer fluid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission as shown. To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the filler hole
to bring it to the upper mark.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it is not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
231
DIPSTICK
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole.
Put a new washer on the filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt and
tighten it securely.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your Honda dealer.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
6. 5-speed Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
232
WASHER FILLER BOLT
Correct level
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear differential should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
accordingtothetimeanddistance
recommendations in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Check the fluid level with the rear
differential at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle on level
ground. Remove the differential fluid
filler bolt and washer, and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, slowly add Honda Dual Pump
Fluid until it starts to run out of the
hole.
Put a new washer on the filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt and
tighten it securely.
Use only Honda Dual Pump Fluid.
Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF).
4WD models only
Rear Differential Fluid
Maintenance
233
Correct
level
FILLER BOLT WASHER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as
soon as possible.
Check the fluid level in the reser-
voirs monthly. There are up to two
reservoirs, depending on the model.
They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
The brake fluid should be replaced
according to the time recommenda-
tion in the maintenance schedule.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Brake System
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
234
MIN
MAX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To replace it:
The air cleaner element should be
replaced according to the distance
recommendation in the maintenance
schedule.
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Remove the old air cleaner
element.
Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
Loosen the four bolts with a
Phillips-head screwdriver or a
wrench, then lift up the air cleaner
housing cover.
1.
2.
3.
Replacement
Air Cleaner Element
Maintenance
236
BOLTS
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
BOLTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Honda dealer.
Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, and tighten the four bolts.
4.
5.
Hood Latch
Air Cleaner Element, Hood Latch
Maintenance
237
LATCH ASSEMBLY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Clean off any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
Use a wrench to remove the bolt
holding the ignition coil. Pull the
ignition coil up slightly.
Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
Remove the ignition coil.
Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
Put the new spark plug into the
socket, then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
Remove the four nuts with a
wrench, then remove the coil
cover.
The spark plugs in your vehicle are a
special iridium-tipped design for
longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the distance
recommendation in the maintenance
schedule.
1.
6.
7.
5.2.
4.
3.
Replacement
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
238
NUTS NUTS
BOLT CONNECTOR
IGNITION COIL
LOCK TAB
COIL COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
Connect the wire connector to the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
Push the ignition coil down all the
way. Install the bolt.
Repeat this procedure for the
other three spark plugs.
Reinstall the coil cover, and
tighten the four nuts.
Install the ignition coil into the
hole.
NGK:
DENSO:
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Specifications:
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
239
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
IZFR6K-11
SKJ20DR-M11
Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s
battery monthly.
WARNING:
Wash hands after handling.
Battery
Maintenance
240
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the vehicle’s
electrical system.
If the terminals are severely cor-
roded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative ( ) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. The next
timeyouturnontheradioyouwill
see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency display.
Use the preset buttons to enter the
five-digit code (see page ). You
will then have to set the clock and
enter your station presets.
152
On EX models
Battery
Maintenance
241
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
vehicle’s electronic controls. Detach
the battery cables before connecting
the batteryto a charger.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
Front:
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
Raise the wiper arm off the hatch
glass and hold it.
Rear:
1.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
242
FRONT REAR
WIPER ARMS
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the arms.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal rein-
forcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
If you are changing the rear wiper
blade, go to step 6.
4.3.2.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
243
LOCK TAB
BLADE REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield or the hatch glass.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
244
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on page
.)
Your vehicle’s air conditioning is a
sealed system. Any major mainte-
nance, such as recharging, should be
done by a qualified mechanic. You
can do a couple of things to make
sure the air conditioning works
efficiently.
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
307
On U.S. EX, and Canadian DX and EX
models
Air Conditioning System
Maintenance
245
AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
facility uses a refrigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
refrigerant for reuse. Releasing
refrigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
The condenser and radiator fins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or soft-bristle brush to clean them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To replace it:
The dust and pollen filter is located
behind the glove box.
Remove the dust and pollen filter
cover by pushing in on the lock tab,
then pulling the cover toward you.
The dust and pollen filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the heating
andcoolingsystem.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under
normal conditions. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if air flow from the
heating and cooling system becomes
less than usual.
Open the glove box. Remove the
hooks on the side panels by
pushingontheendofeachhook
fromtheinsideoftheglovebox.
Pivot the glove box out of the way.
1.
2.
Replacement
Dust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
246
HOOKS
TAB
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the first filter by pulling it
straight out of the air conditioning
unit. Remove the second filter by
sliding it to the left, then pulling it
out.
Remove the old filter from the
filter case.
Install the new filter in the case.
Make sure the ‘‘AIR FLOW’’
arrows on the filter and the filter
case face the same direction.
Install the dust and pollen filters
into the air conditioning unit.
Make sure the ‘‘AIR FLOW’’
arrows on the filter point
downward.
Reinstall the dust and pollen filter
cover.
Pivot the glove box up into
position. Reinstall the hooks into
thesidepaneloftheglovebox.
Close the glove box.
If you are not sure how to replace
the dust and pollen filters, have them
replaced by your Honda dealer.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Dust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
247
DUST AND POLLEN FILTERS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the drive belt.
Examine the edges of the belt for
cracks or fraying.
An auto-tensioner adjusts the tension
of the drive belt. The pointer on the
auto-tensioner should be in the
proper range. It should be checked
accordingtothetimeanddistance
recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
If the pointer is out of this range or
you see signs of wear, have the drive
belt replaced by your Honda dealer
as soon as possible.
Drive Belt
Maintenance
248
Proper range
POINTER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated. The
following pages give more detailed
informationonhowandwhento
check air pressure, how to inspect
your tires for damage and wear, and
what to do when your tires need to
be replaced.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,aremore
prone to damage from road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
thesametimeyoucheckallthe
other tires.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the vehicle
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the
vehicle before checking the tire
pressure, the tires can still be
considered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page .250
Inflation
Tires
Maintenance
249
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot [the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers)],
you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to
40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher
than the cold reading. This is normal.
Do not let air out to match the
specified cold pressure. The tire will
be underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds. Tire pressures for high
speed driving are the same as for
normal driving.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold air pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional technical information
about your tires, see page .
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
308
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front:
Rear:
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
Tires
Maintenance
250
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
P215/70R16 99S
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
34 psi (235 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm
)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Excessive tread wear.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consis-
tent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair.
Your vehicle’s tires have wear indica-
tors molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
CONTINUED
Inspection Maintenance
Tires
Maintenance
251
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-to-
back.
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your vehicle’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated.
(Only on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels)
Tire Rotation
Tires
Maintenance
252
Front Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheel weights for
balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s han-
dling.
The tires that came with your
vehicle were selected to match the
performance capabilities of the
vehicle while providing the best
combination of handling, ride
comfort,andlonglife.Youshould
replace them with radial tires of the
same size, load range, speed rating,
and maximum cold tire pressure
rating (as shown on the tire’s
sidewall). Mixing radial and bias-ply
tires on your vehicle can reduce its
braking ability, traction, and steering
accuracy.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
work inconsistently.
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your vehicle. Re-
placement wheels are available at
your Honda dealer.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
Maintenance
253
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋ If you mount snow tires on your
Honda, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tiresonallfourwheelstobalance
your vehicle’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your vehicle’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
areclear.Checkwiththetiredealer
for maximum speed recommenda-
tions.
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading.
Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
308
Snow Tires
Wheels and Tires Winter Driving
Tires
Maintenance
254
16x61/2JJ
P215/70R16 99S
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Because your Honda has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices on the
front tires. Use traction devices only
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires.
Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not
be used. No matter how tight they
seem to be installed, they can come
into contact with the body and
suspension, causing serious damage.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with them installed. If
youhearthemcomingincontact
with the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Make sure the cables are
installed tightly, and that they are
not contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Tire Chains
Tires
Maintenance
255
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the operation of your vehicle’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
vehicle’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
Lights
Maintenance
256
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHT
HEADLIGHT SIDE MARKER LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the following:
If you find any bulbs are burned out,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page to
determine what type of replacement
bulb is needed.
Headlights (low and high beam)
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
High-mount brake light
Turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
License plate lights
Side marker lights
Daytime running lights
(Canadian models)
307
Lights
Maintenance
257
BRAKE/TAILLIGHTS
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS
BACK-UP LIGHT
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustment of the headlights should
be performed by a Honda technician
or other qualified mechanic.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs, one on each side. When
replacing a bulb, handle it by its steel
base and protect the glass from
contactwithyourskinorhard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Open the hood.
If you need to change the
headlight bulb on the driver’s side,
remove the front end of the air
intake duct by pulling it out.
1.
Lights
Maintenance
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
258
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way and remove the bulb.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure it is right side up; it is
marked ‘‘TOP.’’
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
(Driver’s side)
Install the front end of the air
intake duct.
Open the hood. The front
parking/turn signal light is next to
the headlight bulb. On the driver’s
side, remove the front end of the
air intake duct by pulling it out.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Front Parking/Turn
Signal Light Bulb
259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Place a cloth between the trim of
the lens and the body, at the top of
the lens. Remove the front side
marker light assembly by carefully
prying on the trim of the lens with
a small flat-tipped screwdriver.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Install the front end of the air
intake duct.
(Driver’s side)
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
1.
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.
6.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Front Side Marker
Light Bulb
260
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the light assembly back into
the body, bottom first. Push on the
top edge until it snaps into place.
Open the hatch and the tailgate.
Remove the two mounting screws
with a Phillips-head screwdriver,
and remove the taillight assembly
from the body by pulling it back.
Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: brake/
taillight, turn signal light or back-
up light.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Put the socket back into the light
assembly and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
1.
4.
5.
2.
3.
4.
6.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Rear Bulbs
261
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
When reinstalling the taillight
assembly, first place the two pins
in the holes in place. Tighten the
two mounting bolts.
Place a cloth and insert a small
flat-tipped screwdriver between
the left edge of the lens and the
housing. The lens will come down.
Put the lens back into the light
assembly, right side first. Push on
the left edge until it snaps into
place.
1.
2.
6.
7.
3.
4.
5. Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
262
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Put the socket back into the light
assembly and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Put the cover back onto the light
assembly. Push it on until it locks
in place.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Open the hatch. Remove the light
assembly cover by pushing in on
the tabs on both sides and pulling
the cover down.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Maintenance
Lights
263
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Removethelensbycarefully
prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
Although the ceiling light, cargo area
light, and spotlights come apart the
same way, they do not use the same
type of bulbs.
Ceiling light:
Pry on the rear edge of the lens
near both sides.
Spotlights:
Pry on the rear edge of the lens in
the middle.
Cargo area light:
Pryonthefrontedgeofthelens
near both sides.
1.
Replacing Interior Light Bulbs
Lights
Maintenance
264
CEILING LIGHT SPOTLIGHTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
3.
2.
Lights
Maintenance
265
CARGO AREA LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Nonporous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page ).
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
ragsotheydonottouchthe
windshield.
Disconnect the battery.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Reverse
(5-speed manual) or Park
(automatic).
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
amonth).
If you store your vehicle for 12
months or longer, have your Honda
dealer perform the inspections called
for in the 24 months maintenance
schedule (Normal Conditions) as
soon as you take it out of storage
(see page ). The replacements
called for in the maintenance
schedule are not needed unless the
vehicle has actually reached that
time or mileage.
223
212
Storing Your Vehicle
Maintenance
266
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you
informationonhowtocleanyour
vehicle and preserve its appearance:
the paint, brightwork, wheels, and
interior. Also included are several
things you can do to help prevent
corrosion.
.................................Exterior Care . 268
.....................................Washing . 268
.......................................Waxing . 269
....................Aluminum Wheels . 269
..........................Paint Touch-up . 270
..................................Interior Care . 271
..........................Floor Covering . 271
.........................................Fabric . 271
...........................................Vinyl . 271
...................................Seat Belts . 271
....................................Windows . 272
..........................Air Fresheners . 272
....................Corrosion Protection . 273
.................................Body Repairs . 274
Appearance Care
Appearance Care
267
Main Menu
Frequent washing helps preserve
your vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and grit
can scratch the paint, while tree sap
and bird droppings can permanently
ruin the finish.
Wash your vehicle in a shady area,
not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle is
parked in the sun, move it into the
shade and let the exterior cool down
before you start.
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
As you dry the vehicle, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page ).
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with
cool water to remove loose dirt.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommendedinthisOwner’s
Manual.
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for vehicle
washing.
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
the vehicle does not need waxing.
Wash the vehicle using the water
and detergent solution and a soft-
bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
270
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Washing
268
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your vehicle.
The radio antenna on your vehicle does
not need to be removed when you use a
‘‘drive-through’’ vehicle wash. How-
ever, if you remove the antenna, make
sure to reinstall it and tighten it se-
curelyusing an appropriate tool.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Always wash and dry the whole
vehiclebeforewaxingit.Youshould
wax your vehicle, including the metal
trim, whenever water sits on the
surface in large patches. It should
formintobeadsordropletsafter
waxing.
Polishes Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Honda if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloy
wheels as you do the rest of the
exterior.Washthemwiththesame
solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
The wheels have a protective clear-
coat that keeps the aluminum from
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some
commercial wheel cleaners or stiff
brushes, can damage this clear-coat.
Only use a mild detergent and soft
brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the vehicle does
not need waxing.
Waxes A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Honda
when it is new.
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
On some models
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Waxing Aluminum Wheels
269
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Inspect your vehicle frequently for
chips or scratches in the paint.
Repair them right away to prevent
corrosion of the metal underneath.
Use the touch-up paint only on small
chips and scratches. More extensive
paint damage should be repaired by
a professional.
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Paint Touch-up
270
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts air-
drybeforeyouusethevehicle.
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. For general cleaning, use a
soft cloth dampened in a solution of
mild soap and water, then dry with a
soft cloth.
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner.
CONTINUED
Vinyl Seat BeltsFloor Covering
Fabric
Interior Care
Appearance Care
271
LOOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces.
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your
vehicle, it is best to use a solid type.
Some liquid air fresheners contain
chemicals that may cause parts of
the interior trim and fabric to crack
or discolor.
Ifyouusealiquidairfreshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
Windows Air Fresheners
Interior Care
Appearance Care
272
The rear window defogger wires are
bonded to the inside of the glass.
Wiping vigorously up-and-down can
dislodge and break the defogger wires.
When cleaning the rear window, use
gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your vehicle. This
is especially important in areas
that use road salt in winter. It is
also a good idea in humid climates
and areas subject to salt air.
Vehicles equipped with ABS have
a sensor and wiring at each wheel.
Be careful not to damage them.
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Honda. You can
help keep your vehicle from
corroding by performing some
simple periodic maintenance:
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your vehicle:
Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin
hollows on the underside of the
vehicle stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the vehicle.
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
vehicle inspected and repaired
periodically.
1.
2.
Corrosion Protection
Appearance Care
273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want genuine Honda parts used in
the repair. Although most insurers
recognize the quality of original
parts, some may try to specify that
the repairs be done with other
available parts. You should investi-
gate this before any repairs have
begun.
Take your vehicle to your authorized
Honda dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosion-
preventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
Body repairs can affect your vehicle’s
resistance to corrosion. If your
vehicle needs repairs after a collision,
pay close attention to the parts used
in the repair and the quality of the
work.
Make sure the repair facility uses
genuine Honda replacement body
parts. Some companies make sheet
metal pieces that seem to duplicate
the original Honda body parts, but
are actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same high-
quality appearance.
Body Repairs
Appearance Care
274
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section covers the more-
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 276
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 277
..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 283
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very
.....................................Slowly . 283
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 284
................................Jump Starting . 285
............If Your Engine Overheats . 288
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 290
..........Charging System Indicator . 291
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 292
.......................Readiness Codes . 293
...............Brake System Indicator . 294
..............................................Fuses . 295
..........Checking and Replacing . 296
......................Emergency Towing . 301
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
Main Menu
Your vehicle has a compact spare
tire that takes up less space. Use this
sparetireasatemporaryreplace-
ment only. Get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put it back
on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Thecompactsparetirehasashorter
tread life than a regular tire. Replace
it when you can see the tread wear
indicator bars. The replacement
should be the same size and design
tire, mounted on the same wheel.
Thecompactsparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the compact wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces than the regular tire. Use
greater caution while driving on
this tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
Follow these precautions whenever
you are using the compact spare tire:
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
The wheel of the compact spare
tire is designed especially to fit
your vehicle. Do not use your
sparetireonanothervehicle
unlessitisthesamemakeand
model.
Compact Spare Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
276
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
gettoanexitoranareatostopthat
is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level and
non-slippery ground, away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park (automatic) or Reverse
(manual). Apply the parking brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
Open the hatch and the tailgate.
The spare tire, jack, and tools are
under the cargo area floor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
277
JACK SPARE TIRE
TOOLS
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the rear edge of the handle
to raise the handle loop and pull up
the loop to raise the cargo area
floor.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of the cargo area.
Remove the tools and the jack. To
remove the jack, turn the jack’s
end bracket counterclockwise to
loosen it.
Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
8.7.
6.
5.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
278
JACK
WHEEL NUTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Locate the jacking point nearest
thetireyouneedtochange.Itis
pointed to by an arrow molded into
the underside of the body. Place
the jack under the jacking point.
Turn the end bracket clockwise
until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point. Make sure the
jacking point tab is resting in the
jack notch.
Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts and flat
tire. Temporarily place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface of the wheel facing up.
Placing the wheel face down could
mar its finish.
9.
10.
11.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
279
EXTENSION
WHEEL WRENCH
JACKING POINTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully,itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground
and remove the jack.
12.
13.
14.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
280
BRAKE HUB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tools.
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire, and store it in the spare
tire well.
Removethewingboltonthespare
tire mount, and pivot the arm 90°
to the upright position. Then
tighten the wing bolt securely.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
281
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the small round plug from
the cargo area floor by pushing it
fromthebacksidetomakeahole.
Storetheremovedpluginaplace
you can easily remember.
Reinstall the cargo area floor.
Place the flat tire face down on the
cargo area floor.
Align the center of the flat tire
with the hole in the cargo area
floor. Remove the spacer cone
from the wing bolt, turn it over,
and put it back on the bolt.
Secure the flat tire by screwing
thewingbolttothesparetire
mount through the hole in the
cargo area floor.
20.19.
21.
22.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
282
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things: Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
the fuses are OK, there is proba-
bly something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
on page .)
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or Neutral.
285
301
CONTINUED
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
283
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page ).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Your vehicle has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
240
285
84
174
296
301
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
284
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery has run
down,youmaybeabletostartthe
engine by using a booster battery.
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
To jump start your vehicle, follow
these directions closely:
Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,
lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
You cannot start a Honda with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
1.
2.
240
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
285
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can causeit to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
＋
−
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
Honda’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
3. 4.
5.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
286
BOOSTER BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
the jumper cable connections to
make sure they have good metal-
to-metal contact.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until all are
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
6.
7.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
287
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
point, then continue driving.
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
Itmaygohigherifyouaredrivingup
a long steep hill on a very hot day. If
it climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off the heating and cooling
system and all other accessories.
Turn on the hazard warning
indicators.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
Your vehicle can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
288
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See
on page .)
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
10.
9.
8.
7.
6.
11.
12.
301
301
163
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
289
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See
on page .)
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood and check the oil
level (see page ). Although oil
levelandoilpressurearenot
directly connected, an engine that
is very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
1.
2.
4.
3.
162
221
301
Emergency
Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
290
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories: radio, heater, A/C, rear
defogger, cruise control, etc. Try not
to use other electrically-operated
controls such as the power windows.
Keep the engine running and take
extra care not to stall it. Starting the
engine will discharge the battery
rapidly.
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
291
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, it indicates one of
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
your vehicle to put out excessive
emissions. Continued operation may
cause serious damage.
Youshouldalsohavethedealer
inspect your vehicle if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes at least 3 days
of normal driving.
If the indicator remains on past that,
or the fuel cap was not loose or
missing, have the vehicle checked by
the dealer as soon as possible. Drive
moderately until the dealer has
inspected the problem. Avoid full-
throttle acceleration and driving at
high speed.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
292
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If
it then goes off, the readiness codes
are set. If it blinks 5 times, the
readiness codes are not set.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If possible, do not take your vehicle
for a state emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. Refer to
State Emissions Testing for more
information. (See page .)316
Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
293
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the vehicle’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page ). If the
fluid level is low, take the vehicle to
your dealer and have the brake
system inspected for leaks or worn
brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the
vehicle begins to slow down, and you
will have to press harder on the
pedal. The distance needed to stop
will be much longer.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See
on page .)
The Brake System Indicator
normallycomesonwhenyouturn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking brake.
It comes on and stays lit if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the ABS indicator comes on with
this indicator, have the vehicle
inspected by your Honda dealer
immediately.
234
301
On models equipped with ABS
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
294
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
U.S. indicator shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
All the electrical circuits in your
vehicle have fuses to protect them
from a short circuit or overload.
These fuses are located in two fuse
boxes.
The under-hood fuse box is located
in the engine compartment on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
The interior fuse box is underneath
the steering column. To remove the
fuse box lid, turn the knobs
counterclockwise and pull the lid out
of its hinges.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
295
UNDER-HOOD
TAB
INTERIOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check the component’s
operation.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
3.
1.
2.
300299
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
296
FUSE
BLOWN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
5.4.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
297
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
6.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Fuses
298
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replace-
ment fuse with the proper rating for the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
No.
No.
CONTINUED
Amps. Circuits Protected
Amps. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
15 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
Ignition Coil
Accessory Power Socket
Daytime running lights
ACG
Not Used
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
Power Window Relay
AMP
Accessory, Radio
Rear Wiper
Meter
ABS
Daytime running lights
SRS
Remote Control Mirrors
LAF Heater
Not Used
Fuel Pump
Accessory Power Socket
Turn Signal Lights
Front Wiper
Not Used
Front Right Power Window
Front Left Power Window
Not Used
Not Used
: On Canadian models
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
299
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
No. Circuits ProtectedAmps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Condenser Fan
Small Light
Interior Light
Cooling Fan Motor
Hazard
IGP
Horn, Stop
Not Used
Back Up
ABS Motor
Rear Defroster
Heater Motor
Power Window
Option
Left Headlight
Door Lock
Right Headlight
ABS F/S
Battery
Ignition 1
Spare Fuses
30 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
30 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
30 A
100 A
50 A
21 25
7.5A 30A
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Fuses
300
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or,
ifyoubelongtoone,anorganization
that provides roadside assistance.
Never tow your vehicle behind
another vehicle with just a rope or
chain. It is very dangerous.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground.
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
Any other
method of towing will damage the
drive system. When you contact the
towing agency, inform them that a
flat-bed is required.
Refer to
on page
for non-emergency towing
information.
The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
cables lift that end of the vehicle off
the ground. Your vehicle’s
suspension and body can be
seriously damaged.
198
Wheel Lift Equipment
Flat-bed Equipment
Sling-type Equipment
Never tow your vehicle with
wheel lift equipment.
This is the only way to
transport your vehicle.
Towing Your Vehicle
Behind a Motorhome
This method of
towing your Element is
unacceptable.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
301
Towing a 4WD Element with only two
tires on the ground will damage parts
of the 4WD system. It should be
transported on a flat-bed truck or
trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
302
Main Menu
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Honda, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 304
................................Specifications . 306
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 308
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 308
.................................Treadwear . 308
......................................Traction . 308
.............................Temperature . 309
...........................Tire Information . 310
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 311
......Driving in Foreign Countries . 312
.......................Emissions Controls . 313
.....................The Clean Air Act . 313
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 313
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 313
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 313
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 314
....................PGM-FI System . 314
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 314
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 314
....................Replacement Parts . 314
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 315
..............State Emissions Testing . 316
Technical Information
Technical Inf ormation
303
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
placetofindtheVINisonaplate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
Youcanseeitbylookingthrough
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label at-
tached to the driver’s doorjamb
(front edge of rear door), and is
stamped on the engine compartment
bulkhead. The VIN is also provided
in bar code on the Certification label.
Identification Numbers
Technical Inf ormation
304
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block.
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Inf ormation
305
ENGINE NUMBER
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Inf ormation
306
Dimensions
Weights
Capacities
Engine
169.3 in (4,300 mm)
71.5 in (1,815 mm)
70.4 in (1,788 mm)
101.4 in (2,575 mm)
62.1 in (1,577 mm)
62.3 in (1,582 mm)
1.88 US gal (7.1 )
1.90 US gal (7.2 )
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
7.6 US qt (7.2 )
2.0 US qt (1.9 )
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating
1.43 US gal (5.4 )
3.1 US qt (2.9 )
1.45 US gal (5.5 )
6.9 US qt (6.5
)
5.6 US qt (5.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
15.9 US gal (60 )
Fuel tank
Engine oil
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
9.7 : 1
144 cu-in (2,354 cm
)
3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC
VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb (front
edge of rear door).
See spark plug maintenance
section page 239 .
0.145 US gal (0.55
)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
Engine
coolant
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Manual
transmission
fluid
Rear
differential
fluid (4WD)
Windshield
washer
reservoir
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
1.3 US qt (1.2 )
1.1 US qt (1.0
)
2.4 US qt (2.3
)
2.3 US qt (2.2
)
Approx.
Front
Rear
Change
Without filter
Total
1:
2:
Change
Total
Change
Total
Change
4WD
2WD
Total
4WD
2WD
Change
Total
4WD
2WD
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada
Vehicles
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
1
2
2
Including filter
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Specifications
Technical Inf ormation
307
Air Conditioning
Tires
Alignment
Fuses
Battery
Lights
HFC-134a (R-134a)
16.9 18.7 oz (480 530 g)
SP-10
12 V 60/55 W (H4/HB2)
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
8W
4CP
8W
5W
18 W (21 CP)
21/5 W
21 W
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
P215/70R16 99SSize
Pressure
Toe-in
Camber
Caster 1°50’
1°
0°13’
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0.0in(0mm)
Interior
Under-hood
12 V 21/5 W
12 V 3 CP
12 V 21 W
Capacity
See page 299 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the steering
column.
See page 300 or the fuse box
cover.
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm
)
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking
lights
Front side marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Brake/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Cargo area light
High-mount brake light
45 AH/20 HR12 V
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front/Rear
Front
Rear
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Inf ormation
308
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Temperature A,B,C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Inf ormation
309
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Rim diameter in inches.
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
a group of numbers and letters that
look like the following example TIN.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
P
R
16
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
215
70
99
S
Technical Inf ormation
Tire Information
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number
310
P215/70R16 99S
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
informationtobepostedonthe
pump.
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
(methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
(ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.
METHANOL
MTBE
ETHANOL
Oxygenated Fuels
Technical Inf ormation
311
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are planning to take your
Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your vehicle back
into compliance will require the re-
placement of several components,
such as the oxygen sensors and the
three way catalytic converter. These
replacements are not covered under
warranty.
Driving in Foreign Countries
Technical Inf ormation
312
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a Positive
Crankcase Ventilation System. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The Positive Crank-
case Ventilation valve routes them
from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
211
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Emissions Controls
Technical Inf ormation
313
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include three systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control, and Three
Way Catalytic Converter. These
three systems work together to
control the engine’s combustion and
minimize the amount of HC, CO, and
NOx that comes out the tailpipe. The
exhaust emissions control systems
are separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems. The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
genuine Honda replacement parts or
their equivalent for repairs. Using
lowerqualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Engine Control Module (ECM)
or the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-
ing conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
2
2
Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
Technical Inf ormation
314
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any com-
bustible materials that come near it.
Parkyourvehicleawayfromhigh
grass, dry leaves, or other flamma-
bles.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Inf ormation
315
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle re-tested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for re-testing
by doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
Neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(approximately3
minutes).
Testing of Readiness Codes
State Emissions Testing
Technical Inf ormation
316
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your Honda dealer.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use
thecruisecontrol.Whentraffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Technical Inf ormation
State Emissions Testing
317
Main Menu
Table of Contents
318
Main Menu
Customer Relations
................................Information . 320
....................Warranty Coverages . 321
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 322
.....................Authorized Manuals . 323
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
319
Main Menu
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Relations Office.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
304
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Relations Information
320
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 250-4318
American Honda Motor Co.
Honda Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7D
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
coveredfortheusefullifeofthe
vehicle.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Your new Honda is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from a Honda dealer.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emis-
sions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and workman-
ship.
genuine Honda Accessories are
covered under this warranty. Time
and mileage limits depend on the
type of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty manual
for details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2003 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Honda’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2003 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
321
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
Warranty and Customer Relations
322
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
３
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Honda dealer.
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at 1-
800-782-4356
(credit card orders only)
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
323
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Form Description
2003 Honda Element
Service Manual
2003 Honda Element
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2003 Honda Element
Body Repair Manual
2003 Honda Element
Owner’s Manual
2003 Element
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Publication
Form Number
61SCV00
61SCV00EL
61SCV30
31SCV600
31SCVQ00
HON-R
Price
Each
$70.00
$50.00
$44.00
$34.00
$10.00
FREE
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.00
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
www. helminc. com
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
324
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 66, 291
............................Jump Starting . 285
..............................Maintenance . 240
............................Specifications . 307
..............................Before Driving . 157
....................................Belts,Seat .8,50
.........................Beverage Holders . 110
.................................Body Repairs . 274
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 186
.............Break-in, New Linings . 158
....................Bulb Replacement . 261
...........................................Fluid . 234
.......................................Parking . 111
.................System Indicator . 66, 294
........................Wear Indicators . 185
.............................Braking System . 185
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 158
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 77
........................Brights, Headlights . 76
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 261
..............................Brake Lights . 261
......................Cargo Area Light . 265
..............................Ceiling Light . 264
................Front Parking Lights . 259
........Front Side Marker Lights . 260
.................................Headlights . 258
.........High-mount Brake Light . 263
...........................Interior Lights . 264
.................License Plate Lights . 262
...Accessories and Modifications . 165
................................Accessories . 165
.Additional Safety Precautions . 166
............................Modifications . 166
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 86
............Accessory Power Sockets . 113
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 222
.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 54
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 236
..............Air Conditioning System . 118
..............................Maintenance . 245
.........................................Usage . 118
.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 120
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 249
.........................Normal Driving . 250
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 311
......................................Antifreeze . 225
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 68, 188
...................................Operation . 186
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 152
Anti-theft Steering Column
..............................................Lock . 85
..........................Appearance Care . 267
...................Armrest, Driver’s Seat . 93
................................Audio System . 126
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 52
.............Automatic Speed Control . 153
..............Automatic Transmission . 178
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 306
...............Checking Fluid Level . 231
.......................................Shifting . 179
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 178
................Shift Lever Positions . 179
....................Shift Lock Release . 183
Index
A
B
I
Main Menu
＊
＊
Bulb Replacement
............................Specifications . 307
...................................Spotlights . 264
....................Turn Signal Lights . 259
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 258
............................Capacities Chart . 306
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60
..........................Cargo Area Light . 115
.................................Cargo Hooks . 170
.............................Carrying Cargo . 167
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
..........................CD Changer . 134, 147
..............................CD Player . 132, 145
...............................Ceiling Pocket . 112
........................Certification Label . 304
............................................Chains . 255
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 277
............Changing Engine Coolant . 227
.................................Changing Oil . 223
........................................How to . 223
......................................When to . 212
...Charging System Indicator . 66, 291
............Checklist, Before Driving . 173
.....................................Child Safety . 24
.......................................Child Seats . 29
......LATCH Anchorage System . 47
...........................Lower Anchors . 47
............Tether Anchorage Point . 46
....................Cleaner Element, Air . 236
Cleaning
....................Aluminum Wheels . 269
......................................Exterior . 268
.........................................Fabric . 271
..........................Floor Covering . 271
.......................................Interior . 271
...................................Seat Belts . 271
...........................................Vinyl . 271
....................................Windows . 272
.................Clock, Setting the . 130, 142
...................................Clutch Fluid . 235
........................CO in the Exhaust . 312
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 175
...............Consumer Information . 320
.............Controls, Instruments and . 63
Coolant
........................................Adding . 225
....................................Checking . 163
.........................Proper Solution . 225
...................................Replacing . 227
...................Temperature Gauge . 74
....................Corrosion Protection . 273
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 313
............Cruise Control Operation . 153
........Customer Relations Office . 320
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
.......................................Dashboard . 64
................Daytime Running Lights . 77
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 322
........................Defog and Defrost . 124
................Defogger, Rear Window . 81
..............Defrosting the Windows . 124
....................................Dimensions . 306
...............Dimming the Headlights . 76
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 231
..................................Engine Oil . 162
..........................Directional Signals . 77
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 185
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 224
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 87
Index
C
D
II
Main Menu
CONTINUED
......................Power Door Locks . 87
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 308
Downshifting, 5-speed Manual
.............................Transmission . 176
.......................................Drive Belt . 248
...........................................Driving . 171
....................................Economy . 164
.........................In Bad Weather . 189
................In Foreign Countries . 312
........................Driving Guidelines . 172
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 246
..............................Economy, Fuel . 164
............Emergencies on the Road . 275
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 285
...........Brake System Indicator . 294
................Changing a Flat Tire . 277
.....Charging System Indicator . 291
..................Checking the Fuses . 296
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 290
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 292
..................Overheated Engine . 288
.........................Emergency Brake . 111
......................Emergency Flashers . 81
......................Emergency Towing . 301
.......................Emissions Controls . 313
.............Emissions Testing, State . 316
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 74
...................................Drive Belt . 248
......Engine Speed Limiter . 177, 182
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 66, 292
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 66, 290
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 221
...............................Overheating . 288
............................Specifications . 306
.......................................Starting . 174
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 311
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 313
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 60
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 21
..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 268
............................Fabric, Cleaning . 271
...................................Fan, Interior . 118
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 117
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 159
Filters
................................Air Cleaner . 236
.........................Dust and Pollen . 246
...............................................Oil . 223
5-speed Manual Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 232
................................Shifting the . 176
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 81
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 277
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 231
..........................................Brake . 234
.........................................Clutch . 235
..............Manual Transmission . 232
..........................Power Steering . 235
.......................Rear Differential . 233
..................Windshield Washer . 230
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 143
...........................Folding Rear Seat . 99
.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 312
Index
E
F
III
Main Menu
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 258
................................................Hatch . 89
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 81
Headlights
........................................Aiming . 258
............Daytime Running Lights . 77
..................High Beam Indicator . 69
........................Reminder Beeper . 76
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 258
...................................Turning on . 76
..............................Head Restraints . 94
.....................Heating and Cooling . 118
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 175
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 76
..............High-mount Brake Light . 263
....................................Hood Latch . 237
.......................Hood, Opening the . 160
..............................................Horn .3,75
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 235
.................................Hydroplaning . 190
..........................Four-way Flashers . 81
............................Front Airbags . 10, 54
.................................................Fuel . 158
......................Fill Door and Cap . 159
...........................................Gauge . 73
................Octane Requirement . 158
...............................Oxygenated . 311
........................Reserve Indicator . 69
........................Tank, Filling the . 159
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 296
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 164
..........................................Gasohol . 311
.........................................Gasoline . 158
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 69
...........................................Gauge . 73
................Octane Requirement . 158
........................Tank, Filling the . 159
................Gas Station Procedures . 159
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 74
...............................................Fuel . 73
...............................Speedometer . 72
.................................Tachometer . 72
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 179
5-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 177
..............................Glass Cleaning . 272
........................................Glove Box . 91
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 304
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 83
...........................................Switch . 85
............Timing Control System . 314
........................Immobilizer System . 84
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 65
...............................Infant Restraint . 34
......................................Infant Seats . 34
......LATCH Anchorage System . 47
...........................Lower Anchors . 47
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 249
.........................Normal Driving . 250
.................................Inside Mirror . 106
.............................Inspection, Tire . 251
............................Instrument Panel . 65
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 77
...........................Interior Cleaning . 271
Index
G
H
I
IV
Main Menu
CONTINUED
...............................Interior Lights . 114
........................................Introduction . i
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 279
.......................................Jack, Tire . 277
................................Jump Starting . 285
..................................................Keys . 83
..................................Maintenance . 207
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 219
.................................Record . 217-218
......................Required Indicator . 70
..........................................Safety . 208
.............................Schedule . 212-216
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 66, 292
...................Manual Transmission . 176
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 232
.........................Meters, Gauges . 65, 72
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 310
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 106
...................Neutral Gear Position . 180
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 158
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 177
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 304
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 158
.........................................Odometer . 73
...............................Odometer, Trip . 73
..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 200
Oil
........................Change, How to . 223
......................Change, When to . 212
......................Checking Engine . 162
..............Pressure Indicator . 66, 290
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 222
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 86
.......................Label, Certification . 304
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 77
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 50
...........LATCH Anchorage System . 47
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 258
.......................................Indicator . 65
.........................................Parking . 76
..................................Turn Signal . 77
.....................................Load Limit . 168
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 85
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 85
............................Fuel Fill Door . 159
....................................Glove Box . 91
.................................Power Door . 87
........................................Tailgate . 90
........................Low Coolant Level . 163
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 69
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 66, 290
................................Lower Anchors . 47
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 306
.........................................Luggage . 167
Index
LM
K
J
N
O
V
Main Menu
＊
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 313
..Operation in Foreign Countries . 312
............................Outside Mirrors . 106
.......................................Overdrive . 181
....................Overheating, Engine . 288
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 219
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 311
..............................Paint Touch-up . 270
..............Panel Brightness Control . 77
........................Park Gear Position . 179
...........................................Parking . 184
...............................Parking Brake . 111
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 66, 294
.................................Parking Lights . 76
Parking Over Things that
....................................Burn . 184, 314
.............................PGM-FI System . 314
..................Polishing and Waxing . 269
............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 21
............................Protecting Adults . 13
...Additional Safety Precautions . 22
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21
........................Protecting Children . 24
.......................Protecting Infants . 34
.......Protecting Larger Children . 42
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 46
.............................Using LATCH . 47
...................Radiator Overheating . 288
.....Radio/CD Sound System . 126, 137
...........................Readiness Codes . 293
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 233
.......................................Rear Doors . 88
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 261
............................Rear Seat Access . 95
..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 99
..........................Rear View Mirror . 106
.................Rear Window Defogger . 81
.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 80
...............Reclining the Seat-Backs . 92
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 177
.............................Reminder Lights . 65
............Removing the Rear Seats . 101
Replacement Information
.................Air Cleaner Element . 236
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 246
..........................Engine Coolant . 227
................Engine Oil and Filter . 223
..........................................Fuses . 296
................................Light Bulbs . 258
....................................Schedule . 210
................................Spark Plugs . 238
...........................................Tires . 253
.............................Wiper Blades . 242
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 53
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 163, 225
...............................Restraint, Child . 24
..................Reverse Gear Position . 180
...........................Reverse Lockout . 183
................................Rotation, Tire . 252
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 50
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 322
...........Safety Checklist, Pre-Drive . 12
Index
R
P
S
VI
Main Menu
＊
CONTINUED
.................................Safety Features . 7
.........................................Airbags . 10
..................................Door Locks . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 61
...............................Safety Messages . ii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 50
...............Additional Information . 50
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 52
.....................................Cleaning . 271
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 50
................................Maintenance . 53
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 50, 67
................................Replacement . 53
...................System Components . 50
...............Use During Pregnancy . 21
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 92
...............................Serial Number . 304
...........................Service Intervals . 212
...........................Service Manual . 323
.........Service Station Procedures . 159
..................Setting the Clock . 130, 142
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 178
........................Shift Lock Release . 183
..............................Side Airbags . 10, 56
....................Cutoff Indicator . 58, 67
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 260
...............................Signaling Turns . 77
..........................................Skylight . 107
..............Removing and Storing . 108
.....................................Snow Tires . 254
...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 268
........................Sound System . 126, 137
......................................Spare Tire . 276
................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 238
....................Specifications Charts . 306
................................Speed Control . 153
...................................Speedometer . 72
.......................................Spotlights . 114
..........SRS, Additional Information . 54
...Additional Safety Precautions . 59
.............................Airbag Service . 59
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
...........Indicator Light Works . 58
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 57
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 54
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 56
........................SRS Components . 54
.............................SRS Indicator . 57, 67
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 86
..............State Emissions Testing . 316
.......................Starting the Engine . 174
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 175
................With a Dead Battery . 285
........Steam Coming from Engine . 288
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 82
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 85
...........Stereo Sound System . 126, 137
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 266
Supplemental Restraint
................................System . 10, 54
......................................Servicing . 59
.........................SRS Indicator . 57, 67
...................System Components . 54
..................................Synthetic Oil . 222
Index
VII
Main Menu
＊
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 168
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 306
....Vehicle Identification Number . 304
.............................Vehicle Storage . 266
.....................................Ventilation . 121
.................................................VIN . 304
...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 271
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 222
.....................Underside, Cleaning . 273
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 275
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 308
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 158
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 271
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 224
.....................................Tachometer . 72
Tailgate
............................Open Indicator . 70
.................................Opening the . 90
..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 261
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 275
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 308
.....Emissions Control Systems . 313
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 311
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 315
.......................Temperature Gauge . 74
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46
............................Theft Protection . 152
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 315
..................Time, Setting the . 130, 142
....................................Tire Chains . 255
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 277
...........................Tire Information . 310
...............................................Tires . 249
..............................Air Pressure . 249
.........................Checking Wear . 251
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 308
......................................Inflation . 249
..................................Inspection . 251
..............................Maintenance . 251
...................................Replacing . 253
......................................Rotating . 252
...........................................Snow . 254
............................Specifications . 307
................................Tire Chains . 255
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 277
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 191
...............Behind a Motorhome . 198
................................Emergency . 301
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 231
Checking Fluid Level,
...................................Manual . 232
..................Fluid Selection . 231, 232
..............Identification Number . 304
.............Shifting the Automatic . 178
..................Shifting the Manual . 176
.....................................Treadwear . 308
.......................................Trip Meter . 73
....................................Turn Signals . 77
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 61
..................Warranty Coverages . 321
Index
T U
V
W
VIII
Main Menu
＊
Washers, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 228
.....................................Operation . 79
.........................................Washing . 268
..................Waxing and Polishing . 269
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 82
............Alignment and Balance . 251
......................................Wrench . 279
Windows
.....................................Cleaning . 272
................Operating the Power . 103
...........................Rear, Defogger . 81
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 78
...................................Defroster . 124
.....................................Washers . 230
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 242
.....................................Operation . 78
....................................Worn Tires . 251
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 301
: U.S. and Canada only
Index
IX
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
5-speed Manual Transmission
Fluid:
Rear Differential Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
SpareTirePressure:
15.9 US gal (60
)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher.
Capacity (including differential): 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
2.0 US qt (1.9
)
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Honda Dual Pump Fluid. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Capacity:
1.1 US qt (1.0
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Front:
Rear:
34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
221
231
232
233
235
234
Main Menu
